Philips DVDR70, DVDR-75 Service Manual

Page 1

DVD-Video Recorder DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

Contents Page Contents Page

1 Technical Specifications and Connection

Facilities

2 Safety Information, Gene ra l Notes 5 3 Directions for Use 7 4 Mechanical Instructions 44 5 Diagnostic Software 48 6 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram 87

Wiring Diagram Waveforms 80 Testpoints 83

7 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts 101

Display Panel (Diagram 1) Front Connector (FC) (Diagram 2) 89 Standby Pa nel (STBY) (Diagram 3) 93 Tray Left Panel (TRL) (Diagram 4) 94 Tray Right Panel (TRR) (Diagram 5) 95 Analog Board:Fronted Video (FV) (Diagram 1) 96 Analog Board: In / Out Video (IOV) (Diagram 2) 97 Analog Board: In / Out Audio (IOA) (Diagram 3) 98 Analog Board: Power Supply (PS) (Diagram 4) 99 Analog Board: Multi Sound Processing (MSP)

Analog Board: VPS (Diagram 6) 101 Analog Board: Follow Me (FOME) (Diagram 7) 101 Analog Board: Digital In/O ut (DIGI O) (Diagram 8) 102 Analog Board: Audio Converter 603 3033 (DAC_ADC)

Analog Board: Audio Converter 603 3028 (DAC_ADC) UP Sub Board: Central Controler (CECO)

UP Sub Board: Fan Control (FACO) (Diagram 12) 114 DVIO Board: 1394 Interface (Diagram 1) 117

Copyright 2002 Philips Consumer Electronics B.V. Eindhoven, The Netherlands. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, or otherwise without the prior permission of Philips.

(Diagram 5)

(Diagram 9) (Diagram 10)

(Diagram 11)

100

103 104

113

DVIO Board: Link + Codec (Diagram 2) 118 DVIO Board: uP Part (Diagram 3) 119 DVIO Board: Interface + DAC (Diagram 4) 120 DVIO Board: Clock (Diagram 5) 121 Digital Board: VSM Buffer Memory and Bit Engine Interface (Diagram 1) Digital Board: AV Dec. STI5519 (Diagram 2) 126 Digital Board: AV Decoder Mem. (Diagram 3) 127 Digital Board: Video Enc. Empress (Diagram 4) 128 Digital Board: VIP CVBS Y/C Video Input

Digital Board: Analog Board Cons. Video In/Out Digital Board: Progressive Scan (Diagram 7) 131

Digital Board: Progressive Scan (Diagram 8) 132 Digital Board: Power, Clock and Reset (Diagram 9) 133

8 Alignments 141 9 Circuit-, IC Descriptions and List

of Abbreviations

10 Spare Parts List 230

(Diagram 5) (Diagram 6)

125

129 130

144

Published by GH 0393 Serv ice PaCE Printed in the Netherlands Subject to modification EN 3122 785 13320

Page 2

EN 2 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x11.

Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities

1. Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities

1.1 PCB Locations

Display Board

EPG Board

DVIO Board

Basic Engine

IOE Board

Up Sub Board

Analog Board

Digital Board

1.2 General:

Mains voltage : 198V-276V Mains frequency : 43 Hz - 63Hz Power consumption mains : 28 W Power consumption standby : < 7 W Power consumption low power stand-by : < 3 W

1.3 RF Tuner

Test equipment:Fluke 54200 TV Signal generator Test streams:PAL BG Philips Standard test pattern

1.3.1 System:

PAL B/G, PAL D/K, SECAM L /L’, PA L I

1.3.2 RF - Loop Through:

Frequency range : 45 MHz - 860 MHz

TR 06002_001

300103

Gain: (ANT IN - ANT OUT) : -6 dB to 0dB

1.3.3 Radio Interference:

input voltage /3 tone method (+40 dB min) : no limit

1.3.4 Receiver:

PLL tuning with AFC for optimum reception Frequency range: : 45.25 MHz - 857 MHz Sensitivity at 40 dB S/N : ≥ 60dBµV at 75Ω

(video unweighted )

1.3.5 Video Performance:

Channel 25 / 503,25 MHz, Test pattern: PAL BG PHILIPS standard test pattern, RF Level 74 dBV Measured on SCART 1 Frequency response: : 0 - 4.00 MHz +0-4dB Group delay ( 0.1 MHz - 4.4 MHz ) : 0 nsec ± 150nsec

Page 3

Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities

EN 3DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 1.

1.3.6 Audio Performance:

Audio Performance Analogue - HiFi:

Frequency response at SCART 1 (L+R) output: : 100 Hz - 12 kHz / 0±

3dB S/N according to DIN 45405, 7, 1967 : and PHILIPS standard test pattern video signal: : FM: ≥ 50dB; AM ≥

45dB, unweighted Harmonic distortion ( 1 kHz, ± 25 kHz deviation ): : FM ≤ 1.5%; AM ≤ 2%

Audio Performance NICAM:

Frequency response at SCART 1(L+R) output: : 40 Hz - 15 kHz 0 ±

3dB S/N according to DIN 45405, 7, 1967 : and PHILIPS standard test pattern video signal: : ≥ 60 dB unweighted Harmonic distortion (1 kHz): : ≤ 0.5 %

1.3.7 Tuning

Automatic Search Tuning

scanning time without antenna : typ. 3 min. PAL stop level (vision carrier) : ≥ 37dBµV Maximum tuning error of a recalled program : ± 62.5 kHz Maximum tuning error during operation : ± 100 kHz

Tuning Principle

automatic B,G, I, DK and L/L’detection manual selection in "STORE" mode

1.4 Analogue Inputs

20 - CVBS/Y 21 - Shield

1.4.2 SCART 2 (Connected to AUX)

Pin Signals: 1 -Audio R 1.8V RMS 2-Audio R 3 -Audio L 1.8V RMS 4 -Audio GND 5 -Blue/Chroma

GND 6 -Audio L 7 -Blue in/

Chroma out ± 3dB 0.3Vpp Chroma (burst) 8 -Function

switch 9 -Green GND 10 -P50 control 11 -Green 12 -Nc 13 -Red/Chroma

GND 14 -fast switch

GND 15 -Red in/

Chroma in 16 -fast switch

RGB/ CVBS or

Y 17 -CVBS GND

OUT 18 -CVBS GND

IN 19 -CVBS/Y/RGB

sync 1Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*) 20 -CVBS/Y 21 -Shield

1.4.1 SCART 1 (Connected to TV)

Pin Signals: 1 - Audio R 1.8V RMS 2 - Audio R 3 - Audio L 1.8V RMS 4 - Audio GND 5 - Blue/Chroma GND 6 - Audio L 7 - Blue out/ Chroma in 0.7Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*) 8 - Function switch <2V = TV

>4.5V / <7V = asp. ratio 16:9 DVD

>9.5V / <12V = asp. ratio 4:3 DVD 9 - Green GND 10 - P50 control 11 - Green 0.7Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*) 12 - Nc 13 - Red/Chroma GND 14 - fast switch GND 15 - Red out/ Chroma out 0.7Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*)

± 3dB 0.3Vpp Chroma (burst) 16 - fast switch RGB/ CVBS or Y <0.4V into 75 Ohm = CVBS

>1V / <3V into 75 Ohm = RGB 17 - Y/CVBS GND OUT 18 - Y/CVBS GND IN 19 - CVBS/Y 1Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*)

(*) for 100% white

1.4.3 Audio/Video Front Input Connectors

Audio

Input voltage : 2 Vrms Input impedance : >10kΩ

Video - Cinch

Input voltage : 1 Vpp ± 3dB Input impedance : 75 Ω

Video - YC (Hosiden)

Input voltage Y : 1Vpp ± 3dB Input impedance Y : 75 Ω Input voltage C : burst 300 mVpp ± 3

Input impedance C : 75 Ω

1.5 Video Performance

All outputs loaded with 75 Ohm SNR measurements over full bandwidth without weighting.

1.5.1 SCART (RGB)

SNR : > -65 dB on all output Bandwidth : 4.8 MHz ± 2dB

Page 4

EN 4 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x11.

Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities

1.6 Audio Performance CD

1.6.1 Cinch Output Rear

Output voltage 2 channel mode : 2Vrms ± 2dB Channel unbalance (1kHz) : <1dB Crosstalk 1kHz : >95dB Crosstalk 20Hz-20kHz : >85dB Frequency response 20Hz- 20kHz : ±0.2dB max Signal to noise ratio : >95 dB Dynamic range 1kHz : >85dB Dynamic range 20Hz-20kHz : >80dB Distortion and noise 1kHz : >85dB Distortion and noise 20Hz-20kHz : >75dB Intermodulation distortion : >77dB Mute : >95dB Outband attenuation: : >40dB above 30kHz

1.6.2 Scart Audio

Output voltage 2 channel mode : 1.6Vrms ± 2dB Channel unbalance (1kHz) : <1dB Crosstalk 1kHz : >85dB Crosstalk 20Hz-20kHz : >70dB Frequency response 20Hz- 20kHz : ± 0.2dB max Signal to noise ratio : >85 dB Dynamic range 1kHz : >75dB Dynamic range 20Hz-20kHz : >70dB Distortion and noise 1kHz : >75dB Distortion and noise 20Hz-20kHz : >65dB Intermodulation distortion : >70dB Mute (spin-up, pause, access) : >85dB Outband attenuation: : >40dB above 25kHz

1.11 Laser Output Power & Wavelength

1.11.1 DVD

Output power during reading : 0.8mW Output power during writing : 2 0mW Wavelength : 660nm

1.11.2 CD

Output power : 0.3mW Wavelength : 780nm

1.7 Digital Output

1.7.1 Coaxial

CDDA/ LPCM (incl MPEG1) : according IEC958 MPEG2, AC3 audio : ac cording IEC1937 DTS : ac cording IEC1937,

amendment 1

1.8 Digital Video Input (IEEE 1394)

1.8.1 Applicable Standards

Implementation according: IEEE Std 1394-1995 IEC 61883 - Part 1 IEC 61883 - Part 2 SD-DVCR (02-01-1997) Specification of consumer use digital VCR’s using 6.3 mm magnetic tape - dec.1994 Mechanical connection according: Annex A of 61883-1

1.9 P50 System Control

Via SCART pin nr 10

1.10 Dimensions and Weight

Height of feet : 10mm Apparatus tray closed : WxDxH :435 x 324.5 x

Apparatus tray open : WxDxH :435 x 366 x

Weight without packaging : app. 4 kg ± 0.5 kg Weight in packaging : app. 6.5 kg

88cm

Page 5

Safety Information, General Notes

2. Safety Information, General Notes

EN 5DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 2.

2.1 Safety Instructio ns

2.1.1 General Safety

Safety regulations require that during a repair:

• Connect the unit to the mains via an isolation transformer.

• Replace safety components, indicated by the symbol ,

only by components identical to the original ones. Any other component substitution (other than original type) may increase risk of fire or electrical shock hazard.

Safety regulations require that after a repair, you must return the unit in its original condition. Pay, in particular, attention to the following points:

• Route the wires/cables correctly, and fix them with the

mounted cable clamps.

• Check the insulation of the mains lead for external

damage.

• Check the elect rical DC resistance between the mains plug

and the secondary side:

1. Unplug the mains cord, and connect a wire between the two pins of the mains plug.

2. Set the mains switch to the 'on' position (keep the mains cord unplugged!).

3. Measure the resistance value between the mains plug and the front panel, controls, and chassis bottom.

4. Repair or correct unit when the resistance measurement is less than 1 MΩ.

5. Verify this, before you return the unit to the customer/ user (ref. UL-standard no. 1492).

6. Switch the unit ‘off’, and remove the wire between the two pins of the mains plug.

2.1.2 Laser Safety

This unit employs a laser. Only qualified service personnel may remove the cover, or attempt to service this device (due to possible eye injury).

2.2 Warnings

2.2.1 General

• All ICs and many other semiconductors are susceptible to electrostatic discharges (ESD, ). Careless handling during repair can reduce life drastically. Make sure that, during repair, you are at the same potential as the mass of the set by a wristband with resistance. Keep components and tools at this same potential. Available ESD protection equipment: – Complete kit ESD3 (small tablemat, wristband,

connection box, extension cable and earth cable) 4822 310 10671.

– Wristband tester 4822 344 13999.

• Be careful during measurements in the live voltage section. The primary side of the power supply (pos. 1005), including the heatsink, carries live mains voltage when you connect the player to the mains (even when the player is 'off'!). It is possible to touch copper tracks and/or components in this unshielded primary area, when you service the player. Service personnel must take precautions to prevent touching this area or components in this area. A 'lightning stroke' and a stripe-marked printing on the printed wiring board, indicate the primary side of the power supply.

• Never replace modules, or components, while the unit is ‘on’.

2.2.2 Laser

• The use of optical instruments with this product, will increase eye hazard.

• Only qualified service personnel may remove the cover or attempt to service this device, due to possible eye injury.

• Repair handling should take place as much as possible with a disc loaded inside the player.

• Text below is placed inside the unit, on the laser cover shield:

Laser Device Unit

Type : Semiconductor laser

GaAlAs

Wavelength : 650 nm (DVD)

: 780 nm (VCD/CD)

Output Power : 20 mW

(DVD+RW writing)

:0.8 mW

(DVD reading)

:0.3 mW

(VCD/CD reading)

Beam divergence : 60 degree

Figure 2-1

Note: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

procedure other than those specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

CAUTION VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM ADVARSEL SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING UNDGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING ADVARSEL SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN VARNING SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN VARO! AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASER SÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN VORSICHT SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETSEN DANGER VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENTION RAYONNEMENT LASER VISIBLE ET INVISIBLE EN CAS D'OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU

Figure 2-2

2.2.3 Notes

Dolby

Manufactered under licence from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.

Figure 2-3

Trusurround

TRUSURROUND, SRS and symbol (fig 2-4) are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TRUSURROUND technology is manufactured under licence frm SRS labs, Inc.

Figure 2-4

Page 6

EN 6 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x12.

Video Plus

“Video Plus+” and “PlusCode” are registered trademarks of the Gemstar Development Corporation. The “Video Plus+” system is manufactored under licence from the Gemstar Development Corporation.

Figure 2-5

Macrovision

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be autorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Safety Information, General Notes

Page 7

3. Directions For Use

Briefly press the button during playback: Previous chapter/film or

previous title

Hold down the button: Search backwards

Hold down button during still picture, slow motion backwards

Briefly press the button during playback: Next chapter/film or next title

Hold down the button: Search forwards

Hold down button during still picture, slow motion forwards

(TIMER)

Hold down button, opens and closes the disc tray.

Directions For Use

DVD recorder switches to pause. You will see a still picture.

If this button is pressed during recording, the DVD recorder will also

switch to pause.

EN 7DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

N Select previous title/search backwards :

O Select next title/search forwards :

STOP h Stop: Stop playback/recording, except with programmed recordings

ENGLISH

AUDIO Audio: Select the audio language. For recording language 1 or 2

REC/OTR n Record: Record the current TV channel

PAUSE 9 Pause (still picture): If this button is pressed during playback, the

Additional TV functions

'(Chapter) directly from the

'(Title)/'

This will only work with TV sets with the same remote control code *RC5) (e.g. Philips TV sets)

TV VOLUME q TV volume: Increase TV volume

TV VOLUME r TV volume: Reduce TV volume

For the following functions you need to hold down the button at the side DVD/TV and then

select the function you need with the appropriate button.

STANDBY m Switching the TV off:

CH- B TV programme number: To select a lower programme number

0..9 Number buttons:0 -9

CH+ A TV programme number: To select a higher programme number

/without

or to alter or clear a programmed TIMER

tuner) in the DVD recorder (TV picture on the TV set) and playback on

MONITOR Monitor: This button lets you switch between the TV receiver (internal

The remote control

the DVD recorder.

STANDBY m Switch on or off: To switch set on or off, interrupt menu function,

interrupt a programmed recording (TIMER)

to the TV set. This lets you watch the picture from any unit connected

TV/DVD TV/DVD switch: Switches the scart socket EXT 2 AUX-I/O directly

to this scart socket (set-top box', video recorder or satellite receiver)

and at the same time record from another source.

If you have not connected a device to the EXT 2 AUX-I/O socket, use

this button to switch between TV reception and the DVD recorder.

But this only works if you use a scart cable to connect the TV set to

your DVD recorder ( EXT 1 TO TV-I/O socket) and your TV set

responds to this switch-over.

menu bar

If 'INFO' appears in the display, the index menu from a recorded disc or

an introductory film will be shown. In this case, this function is not

available.

T/C Title/Chapter: Choose the '

PLAY MODE Playback type: Choose between repeat, shuffle play and intro-scan

REC MODE Record type (quality): To select the maximum possible record time

the screen)

0..9 Number buttons:0 -9

DISC-MENU Disc menu: To show the DVD menu or the index screen

SYSTEM-MENU System menu: Call up/cancel the main menu (menu bar at the top of

SELECT Select: Select function/value

OK Store/confirm: To store or confirm entry

DC Cursor keys : Cursor left, right

CH+ A Cursor buttons/Plus : Cursor up/ Next programme number

CH- B Cursor buttons/Minus : Cursor down / Previous programme number

ShowView

TIMER TIMER: To make a TIMER programming with ShowView

chapter markers

FSS & EDIT: For displaying the edit menu for DVD+R(W) discs, for setting

RETURN Back: Return to previous menu on a video CD (VCD). This also works

with some DVDs.

CLEAR Delete: To delete last entry or clear programmed recording (TIMER)

PLAY G Playback: To play a recorded disc.

Page 8

EN 8 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

Front of the device

STANDBY/ON m Switch on or off: To switch off or on, interrupt a function, interrupt a

OPEN/CLOSE J Open/close disc tray: Open/close disc tray

RECORD Record: Record the current TV channel

G Playback: To play a recorded disc

N Select previous title/search backwards

O Select next title/search forwards

h Stop: Interrupt playback/recording

programmed recording (TIMER)

Behind the flap at the righthand corner on the front

S-VIDEO SVideo socket: Connection of SVHS/Hi8 camcorders or SVHS/Hi8

Yellow socket

VIDEO

White/red socket

left AUDIO right

Switching between the S-VIDEO and VIDEO sockets takes place automatically. If both sockets are in use, the signal at the S-VIDEO socket has priority.

DV IN iLink/DV socket (digital video input, IEEE 1394, FireWire):

video recorders (programme number 'CAM1')

Video input socket: Connection of camcorders or video recorders (programme number 'CAM1')

Audio input socket left/right : Connection of camcorders or video recorders (programme number 'CAM1')

Connecting a digital camcorder or other suitable device (programme number 'CAM2').

ENGLISH

Back of the unit

4MAINS Mains socket: Connection to the mains supply (230V/50Hz)

ANTENNA IN Aerial input: Connection of the aerial

TV OUT Aerial output: Connection of the TV set

EXT 2 AUX-I/O Scart socket 2: Connection of an additional device (satellite receiver,

EXT 1 TO TV-I/O Scart socket 1: Connection of a TV set. RGB output

set-top box, video recorder, camcorder, etc.)

Output sockets (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)

OUT S-VIDEO (Y/C) SVideo output: Connection of an S-Video-compatible TV set

OUT VIDEO

(CVBS)

OUT L AUDIO R Analogue audio output (white/red socket): Connection of a TV

Video output (yellow socket): Connecting a TV set with a video input (CVBS, Composite Video)

set with audio input sockets or connection of an additional device

Output socket (DIGITAL AUDIO OUT)

DIGITAL AUDIO

OUT

Digital audio output: Connection of a digital audio device (amplifier/receiver)

The symbols on your DVD recorder display

These symbols can light up on your DVD recorder display:

Multi-function display/text line

•) Clock

•) Disc/title playing time

•) OTR switch-off time

•) Title name

•) Display of the programme number of the TV channel/playing time/channel name/function.

•) Display of information and alerts

Directions For Use

Page 9

READING

IIIIIIIIIIIIIII

SAT

TIMER

o(((

VPS/PDC

LANG II

Disc bar: Displays the current position on the disc (disc pointer). Play/Record: Single flashing segment at the current position. Pause: Flashing segment on both sides of the current position. Stop: Illuminated segment at the current position.

A satellite recording has been programmed.

A recording (timer) has been programmed

A remote control signal has been received

Video programming system / programme delivery control: A VPS or PDC code will be transmitted for the selected TV program

During playback a HiFi/2 channel tone was detected or a HiFi/2 channel tone was received. 'I' or 'II' lights up depending on which sound channel has been selected

Messages in the DVD recorder display

The following messages may appear in your DVD recorder display

IS TV ON? The DVD recorder is in initial installation mode. Switch the TV on, then

NO SIGNAL No input signal available (signal inadequate or unstable)

MENU The menu on the screen is active

OPENING Disc tray opening

TRAY OPEN Disc tray open

CLOSING Disc tray closing

READING Disc being read

MENU UPDT Once recording has been successfully completed the table of contents is

INIT MENU The menu structure is created after the first recording has been made

COPY PROT You have tried to copy a copy-protected DVD/video cassette.

WAIT Please wait until this message disappears. The DVD recorder is busy

NO DISC A disc has not been inserted for recording. If a disc has been inserted, it

INFO

BUSY The DVD recorder is processing the changes to make them DVD

ERASING The entire disc is erased

read the paragraph on 'Initial installation' in 'Installing your DVD recorder'.

created.

on a new disc

performing a task.

cannot be read.

Information about the inserted DVD is displayed on the screen

compatible

ENGLISH

EMPTYDISC The disc inserted is either new or has been completely erased (no

PROTECTED The disc is protected against recording.

MAX TITLE The maximum number of titles per disc has been reached. The

MAX CHAP The maximum number of chapters per title/disc has been reached. The

DISC FULL The disc is full. There is no space for new recordings

PAL DISC A disc with PAL recordings has been inserted. The machine is trying to

NTSC DISC A disc with NTSC recordings has been inserted. The machine is trying

RECORDING An illegal action (e.g. OPEN/CLOSE J button) was attempted during

FREETITLE Playback was started for an empty title or the following title is empty.

DISC LOCK An attempt has been made to record during playback of a protected

DISC ERR An error occurred when writing the title. If this error keeps occurring,

DISC WARN An error occurred when writing the title. Recording was continued; the

SETUP After the automatic search the menu for setting the date/time will

WAIT 01 During the automatic search the TV channels found are counted

BLOCKED The disc tray cannot be closed/opened.

SAFE REC The new recording will be added at the end of all the other recordings

EASYLINK Data is being transferred from the 'EasyLink' TV.

POST-FORMAT Post format

recordings).

maximum number of titles per disc is 48.

maximum number of chapters per title is 124.

record an NTSC signal. Insert a new disc or one that contains NTSC recordings.

to record a PAL signal. Insert a new disc or one that contains PAL recordings.

recording.

disc. This message appears if an attempt is made to insert a chapter marker ( FSS & button).

please clean the disc or use a new one. For instructions on how to clean a disc see the section on 'Cleaning the discs' in the next chapter.

error was skipped

appear on the screen.

(SAFE RECORD).

Directions For Use

EN 9DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Page 10

EN 10 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

Connecting the DVD recorder

Preparing the remote control for operation

The remote control and its batteries are packed separately in the original DVD recorder packaging. You must install the batteries in the remote control before use - described in the following section.

1 Take the remote control and the enclosed batteries (2 batteries).

2 Open the battery compartment, insert the batteries as shown and

then close the battery compartment.

The remote control is now ready to use. Its range is approximately 5 to 10 meters.

'Aim' correctly

In the following sections, you will need the remote control for the first time. Aim the remote control at the DVD recorder and not at the TV set.

Connecting your DVD recorder to the TV set

The necessary cable connections must be made before you can record or playback TV programmes using your DVD recorder.

Connect the DVD recorder directly to your TV set. If there is a video recorder in between the picture quality may be poor. We recommend that you use a scart cable to connect your TV set and DVD recorder.

Tip

ENGLISH

When you install your DVD recorder for the first time, select one of the following options:

'Connecting with a scart cable and Easy Link'

If your TV set is equipped with 'Easy Link, Cinema Link, NexTView Link, Q-Link, Smart Link, Megalogic, Datalogic, ...' and you wish to use a scart cable.

'Connecting with a scart cable without Easy Link'

If your TV set is not equipped with 'Easy Link, Cinema Link, NexTView Link, Q-Link, Smart Link, Megalogic, Datalogic, ...' and you wish to use a scart cable.

'Connecting with an SVideo(Y/C)cable'

If your TV set is equipped with an S-Video(SVHS) socket.

'Connecting with video(CVBS) cable'

If your TV set is equipped only with an video(CVBS) socket.

Connecting with a scart cable and 'Easy Link'

Your DVD recorder can exchange information with your TV set using 'Easy Link'. Your TV channels can also be transferred in the same order from your TV set to your DVD recorder using 'Easy Link'. Please see your TV's operating instructions.

Have the following cables ready: an aerial cable (1, supplied), a mains cable (2, supplied), a special scart cable (3, suitable for Easylink).

1 Switch off your TV set.

2 Remove the aerial cable plug from your TV set. Insert it into the

ANTENNA IN socket at the back of the DVD recorder.

Directions For Use

Connecting the DVD recorder

What is a scart cable?

The scart or Euro AV cable serves as the universal connector for picture, sound and control signals. With this type of connection, there is practically no loss of quality in picture or sound transmission.

3 Insert one end of the supplied aerial cable into the TV OUT socket at

the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into the aerial input socket at the back of the TV set.

4 Plug in a special scart cable (for Easylink) into the scart socket EXT 1

TO TV-I/O at the back of the DVD recorder and the corresponding

scart socket at the back of the TV set (see TV set operating instructions).

Connecting the DVD recorder

Page 11

EasyLink loading data from TV; please wait

Audio Language

English Español Français English Italiano

Press OK to continue

Virgin mode

5 Switch on the TV set.

6 Insert one end of the supplied mains cable into the mains socket

4MAINS at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into

the wall socket.

7 A message appears on the screen announcing that the transfer has

started. 'EASYLINK' appears on the display during transfer. The TV set transfers all saved TV channels, in the same order, to the DVD recorder. This may take several minutes.

a'Time', 'Year', 'Month', 'Date' appears on the TV screen

Normally the date and time are taken from the data sent by the TV channel stored on programme P01. If th aerial signal is too weak or there is excessive interference, you should set the date and time manually:

Check if the time in 'Time' is correct.

If required, change the time with the number buttons 0..9 on your remote control.

Select the next line with CH+ A or CH- B .

Check if the displayed settings for 'Year', 'Month' and 'Date' are correct.

When all information is correct, save by pressing OK .

I can see more installation menus on my TV set

Not all the necessary data has been transferred. Please enter the settings by hand as follows. For more information on the various functions see 'Initial installation' in 'Installing your DVD recorder'.

Select the desired audio language using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with OK .

Select the desired subtitle language with CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with OK .

Select the desired screen format position using CH- B or CH+ A .

'4:3 letterbox' For a 4:3 TV set; cinema format (black bars above and

'4:3 panscan' For a 4:3 TV set; full height format with the sides cut

'16:9' For a 16:9 TV set

Confirm with OK .

Select the country of your residence with CH- B or CH+ A . If your country does not appear, select 'Other'.

Confirm with OK .

below the picture)

off

Initial installation is now complete.

Problem

ENGLISH

Connecting with a scart cable without 'Easy Link'

Have the following cables ready: an aerial cable (1, supplied), a mains cable (2, supplied), a scart cable (3).

1 Remove the aerial cable plug from your TV set. Insert it into the

ANTENNA IN socket at the back of the DVD recorder.

2 Insert one end of the supplied aerial cable into the TV OUT socket at

the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into the aerial input socket at the back of the TV set.

3 Plug a scart cable into the scart socket EXT 1 TO TV-I/O at the

back of the DVD recorder and the scart socket for the DVD recorder at the back of the TV set (see TV set operating instructions).

My TV set has several scart sockets. Which one should I use?

Select the scart socket that is suitable for both video output and for video input.

My TV set shows me a selection menu for the scart socket

Select 'VCR' as tje source for this scart socket.

4 Switch on the TV set.

5 Insert one end of the supplied mains cable into the mains socket

4MAINS at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into

the wall socket. The most important features of the DVD recorder will appear in scrolling text on the display. After the first installation is completed this function will be switched off. How you switch on this function again, read in the chapter 'User preferences' in the section 'standby'.

6 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .'IS TV ON?'

will appear on the display.

Directions For Use

Connecting the DVD recorder

7 If the connection was properly made and your TV was automatically

switched to the programme number for the scart socket, e.g. 'EXT',

'0', 'AV', you will see the following picture:

Connecting the DVD recorder

EN 11DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Page 12

EN 12 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

Menu Language

English Español Français Italiano Deutsch

Press OK to continue

Virgin mode

aMy screen is empty.

b Many TV sets are switched by the DVD recorder to the programme

number for the scart socket by way of a control signal sent through the scart cable.

b If the TV set does not automatically switch to the scart socket programme

number, manually change to the corresponding programme number on your TV set (see your TV's operating instructions).

b Check that the scart cable is connected from the TV set to the EXT 1

TO TV-I/O socket on the DVD recorder. The EXT 2 AUX-I/O socket is

intended only for additional devices.

Then, read the paragraph on 'Initial installation' in 'Installing your DVD recorder'.

Problem

Connecting with an SVideo(Y/C)cable

This connecting cable, also known as the SVHS cable, is used to transmit the brightness signal (Y signal) and colour signal (C signal) separately. This mini DIN socket/plug is also called a Hosiden socket/plug.

Have the following cables ready: an aerial cable (1, supplied), a mains cable (2, supplied), an S-Video(SVHS) cable (3), an audio cable (4, supplied, red/white plug).

1 Remove the aerial cable plug from your TV set. Insert it into the

ANTENNA IN socket at the back of the DVD recorder.

2 Insert one end of the supplied aerial cable into the TV OUT socket at

the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into the aerial input socket at the back of the TV set.

3 Insert one end of an S-Video(SVHS) cable into the OUT S-VIDEO

(Y/C) socket at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into

the S-Video (SVHS) input socket on the TV set (usually labelled 'S-Video in' or 'SVHS in'. See TV operating instructions).

ENGLISH

4 Insert one end of the supplied audio (Cinch) cable into the red/white

Cinch socket OUT L AUDIO R at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into the audio input socket (usually red/white) on the TV set (usually labelled 'Audio in' or 'AV in'. See TV operating instructions).

5 Switch on the TV set. Switch the TV set over to the SVHS input

socket or select the relevant programme number. Please see your TV's operating instructions for the programme number you need.

6 Insert one end of the supplied mains cable into the mains socket

4MAINS at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into

7 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m . IS TV ON?'

will appear on the display.

Then, read the paragraph on 'Initial installation' in 'Installing your DVD recorder'.

Connecting with video(CVBS) cable

This cable, usually with yellow Cinch connectors, is used for transmitting the Composite Video signal (FBAS, CVBS). In this method of transmission the colour signal and the brightness signal are transmitted on the same cable. In certain circumstances, this can lead to problems with the picturem, such as 'Moiré' patterns.

Have the following cables ready: an aerial cable (1, supplied), a mains cable (2, supplied), a video (CVBS)cable (3, supplied, yellow plug), an audio cable (4, supplied, red/white plug).

1 Remove the aerial cable plug from your TV set. Insert it into the

ANTENNA IN socket at the back of the DVD recorder.

2 Insert one end of the supplied aerial cable into the TV OUT socket at

the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into the aerial input socket at the back of the TV set.

Directions For Use

Connecting the DVD recorder

Page 13

3 Insert one end of the supplied video (CVBS) cable into the yellow

Cinch socket OUT VIDEO (CVBS) at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into the video input socket (usually yellow) on the TV set (usually labelled 'Video in' or 'AV in'. See TV operating instructions).

4 Insert one end of the supplied audio (Cinch) cable into the red/white

5 Switch on the TV set. Switch the TV set over to the Video/Audio

input socket or select the relevant programme number. Please see your TV's operating instructions for the programme number you need.

6 Insert one end of the supplied mains cable into the mains socket

4MAINS at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into

7 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .'IS TV ON?'

will appear on the display.

Then, read the paragraph on 'Initial installation' in 'Installing your DVD recorder'.

ENGLISH

Connecting additional devices

Connecting additional devices to the second scart socket

You can connect additional devices such as decoders, satellite receivers, camcorders, etc. to the

EXT 2 AUX-I/O socket. When playback is started on this additional device the DVD recorder

automatically connects the EXT 2 AUX-I/O scart socket with the EXT 1 TO TV-I/O scart socket. You will then see the picture from the additional device on your TV set, even if the DVD recorder is switched off. The TV/DVD button on the remote control allows you to switch between playback through the

EXT 2 AUX-I/O scart socket and playback from the DVD recorder.

Connecting additional video recorders

You can connect a video recorder to the EXT 2 AUX-I/O socket. If you have an SVHS video recorder you can also use the OUT S-VIDEO (Y/C) socket and the

OUT L AUDIO R sockets.

Please note:

Most prerecorded video cassettes and DVDs are copy-protected. If you try to copy them you will see the message 'COPY PROT' on the DVD recorder's display.

aWhen copying video cassettes the display on the DVD recorder

shows 'NO SIGNAL'

b Check that the cable is plugged in firmly. b If a recording is made from a video recorder, change the tracking on the

video recorder.

b The DVD recorder may not be able to recognise the video input signal if

this signal is poor or does not comply with relevant standards.

When I copy DVD video discs or prerecorded video cassettes the

picture is fuzzy and the brightness varies

b This happens if you try to copy DVDs or video cassettes that have been

copy-protected. Even though the picture on the TV is fine the recording on a DVD+R(W) is faulty. This interference is unavoidable with copy-protected DVDs or video cassettes.

Directions For Use

Problem

Connecting the DVD recorder

EN 13DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Connecting additional devices

Page 14

EN 14 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

Connect camcorder to the front sockets

To copy camcorder recordings, you can use the front sockets. These sockets are located behind the flap on the left hand side.

Best picture quality

If you have a DV or Digital 8 camcorder, connect the DV IN input of the DVD recorder to the appropriate DV output on the camcorder. When films are transferred the original recording date and time are stored as DVD subtitles. On playback, this data can be displayed on the TV screen by using the '

' function (Subtitle).

Very good picture quality

If you have a Hi8 or S-VHS(C) camcorder, connect the S-VIDEO input of the DVD recorder to the appropriate S-VHS output on the camcorder. You must also connect the audio input left AUDIO right on the DVD recorder to the audio output on the camcorder.

Good picture quality

If you have a camcorder that only has a single video output (Composite Video, CVBS), connect the VIDEO input on the DVD recorder to the appropriate output on the camcorder. You must also connect the audio input left AUDIO right on the DVD recorder to the audio output on the camcorder.

Connecting audio devices to the analogue audio sockets

Two audio output sockets OUT L AUDIO R are located on the back of the DVD recorder (audio signal output left/right)

These can be used to connect the following:

•) a receiver with Dolby Surround Pro Logic

•) a receiver with twochannel analogue stereo

ENGLISH

Connecting audio devices to the digital audio socket

At the back of the DVD recorder there is a digital audio output socket DIGITAL AUDIO OUT for an coaxial cable.

These can be used to connect the following:

•) an A/V receiver or an A/V amplifier with a digital multichannel sound decoder

•) a receiver with twochannel digital stereo (PCM)

Digital multichannel sound

Digital multi-channel sound offers the best possible sound quality. You will need a multi-channel A/V receiver or amplifier that supports at least one of the audio formats of the DVD recorder (MPEG2, Dolby Digital and DTS). Consult the operating instructions for your receiver to find out which audio formats it supports.

aAll I can hear from my loudspeakers is a loud distorted noise

b The receiver is not compatible with the digital audio format of the DVD

recorder. The audio format of the DVD disc is displayed in the status window when you switch to anoter language. Playback in six-channel digital surround sound is only possible if the receiver has a digital multi-channel sound decoder.

Problem

Directions For Use

Connecting additional devices

Can I use the 'Phono' input on my amplifier?

This socket (input) on the amplifier is designed only for record players without preamplifiers. Do not use this input for connecting the DVD recorder. The DVD recorder or the amplifier may be damaged as a result.

Connecting additional devices

Page 15

Installing your DVD recorder

Menu Language

English Español Français Italiano Deutsch

Press OK to continue

Audio Language

English Español Français English Italiano

Press OK to continue

Subtitle Language

English Español Français English Italiano

Press OK to continue

Virgin mode

Initial installation

After successfully connecting your DVD recorder to the TV set and other additional devices as described in the previous chapters, this chapter will show you how to start the initial installation. The DVD recorder automatically seeks out and stores all available TV channels.

Connecting additional devices

If you have connected additional devices such as a satellite receiver to the aerial cable, switch them on. The automatic channel search will recognise it and save it.

No aerial connected

Even if you only want to use the DVD recorder to play back or have only connected a satellite receiver, you must still complete the initial installation. This is necessary so that the basic settings are stored correctly. Once initial installation is complete you can use the DVD recorder as normal.

1 Select the desired language for the on-screen menu by pressing

CH- B or CH+ A .

What is an onscreen menu?

The multi-language on-screen menu takes the mystery out of using your new DVD recorder. All settings and/or functions are displayed on your TV screen in the relevant language.

2 Confirm with OK .

3 Select the desired audio language using CH- B or CH+ A .

What is an audio language?

The DVD will play the sound in the language you select, provided this language is available on the disc. If it is not available on the disc the fist language on the DVD will be used instead. The DVD Video Disc menu, if available, will also be displayed in the language you select.

4 Confirm with OK .

5 Select the desired language for the subtitles by pressing CH- B or

CH+ A .

What is the subtitle language?

The subtitles will be displayed in the language you select, provided this language is available on the disc. If it is not available on the disc the fist language on the DVD will be used instead.

6 Confirm with OK .

Tip

ENGLISH

TV Shape

4:3 letterbox 4:3 panscan 16:9

Press OK to continue

Country

Austria Belgium Denmark Finland France

Press OK to continue

Installation

Autom. search

Searching for TV channels

00 Channels found

Please wait

Autom. search

Autom. search complete 00 Channels found

Time 20:01 Year 2003 Month 01 Date 01

To continue Press OK

Virgin mode

7 Select the desired screen format position using CH- B or CH+ A .

These settings will only be used if you insert a DVD that contains this information.

Which screen formats can I select?

'4:3 letterbox' for a 'wide-screen' (cinema format) picture with black bars at

'4:3 panscan' for a full-height picture with the sides trimmed.

'16:9' for a wide-screen TV set (screen edge ratio 16:9)

8 Confirm with OK .

9 Select the country of your residence with CH- B or CH+ A .

If your country does not appear, select 'Other'.

Why do I have to select a country?

To call up the specific settings for the respective country, you must first install the country.

0 Confirm with OK .

A After you connect the aerial (or cable TV, satellite receiver, etc.) to

the DVD recorder, press OK . The automatic TV channel search starts. 'WAIT' will appear on the display.

The DVD recorder cannot find any TV stations

b Select channel 1 on the TV set. Can you see the stored TV channel on the

TV set? If not, check the cable connection from the aerial (aerial socket) to the DVD recorder and to the TV set.

b Please have patience.

The DVD recorder searches the entire frequency range in order to find and save the largest possible number of TV channels.

b If you have not connected an aerial, go through all the basic settings right

to the end and then, if you wish, start the automatic search (see 'Automatic TV station search').

B When the automatic TV channel search is complete, 'Autom. search

complete' will appear on the TV screen. 'Time', 'Year', 'Month', 'Date' will then appear on the TV screen.

C Check if the time in 'Time' is correct.

À If required, change the time with the number buttons 0..9 on your

remote control.

Á Select the next line with CH+ A or CH- B .

the top and bottom.

Directions For Use

Problem

EN 15DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Installing your DVD recorder

Page 16

Â Check if the displayed settings for 'Year', 'Month' and 'Date' are

correct.

Ã When all information is correct, save by pressing OK .

The initial installation is now complete.

Satellite receiver

If you are connecting a satellite receiver, please read the section on 'Using a satellite receiver'.

Decoder

If you are connecting a decoder, you must install it as described in the next section.

aSound may be distorted on some TV channels.

b If the sound is distorted on any of the stored TV channels or if there is no

sound at all, the wrong TV system may have been stored for the TV channel. Read 'Manual TV channel search' for information on how to change the TV system.

Tip

Problem

Using a satellite receiver

TV channels from a satellite receiver (connected to scart socket EXT 2 AUX-I/O ) are received on the DVD recorder on programme number 'EXT2'

If necessary, use the MONITOR button to switch to the internal tuner. Select programme number 'EXT1' with 0 on the remote control and then select programme number 'EXT2' with CH- B . You should select the TV channels to be received by the satellite receiver directly on the receiver itself.

ENGLISH

Installation

Manual search

Channel/freq. CH Entry/search 01 Programme number 01 TV channel name BBC1 Decoder Off TV system PAL-BG NICAM On Fine tuning 0

Allocating a decoder

Some TV channels send coded TV signals that can only be viewed properly with a purchased or rented decoder. You can connect such a decoder (descrambler) to your DVD recorder. The following function automatically activates the connected decoder for the TV channel you want to watch.

How do I allocate the decoder for Easy Link?

If your TC=V set supports 'Easy Link' the decoder must be assigned to the relevant TV channel on the TV set (see the operating instructions for your TV set). Settings cannot then be made in this menu.

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .

3 Use the CH+ A and CH- B buttons or the number buttons

0..9 on the remote control to select the TV channel for which you

want to use the decoder. If necessary, use the MONITOR button to switch to the internal tuner.

4 Press the SYSTEM-MENU button on the remote control. The menu

bar appears.

To store

Press OK

5 Select '

6 Select 'Installation' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C .

7 Select 'Manual search' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with

8 Select 'Decoder' using CH- B or CH+ A .

9 Select 'On' with D or C .

0 Confirm with OK .

A To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

' symbol with D or C .

C .

How do I switch the decoder off again?

Use C to select 'Off'inthe'Decoder' line on the screen (Decoder off).

EN 16 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

Directions For Use

Installing your DVD recorder

Your decoder has now been allocated to this TV channel.

Installing your DVD recorder

Page 17

Manual TV channel search

In some cases, not all of the available TV channels may have been found and stored during initial installation. In this case, you will need to search for and store the missing or coded TV channels manually.

How can I change the symbol of a TV channel?

In 'TV channel name', press C .

Select the desired symbol position using D or C .

Change the symbol at the symbol position with CH- B or CH+ A .

Select the next symbol position in the same way.

Keep pressing C until the cursor disappears.

Tip

Installation

Manual search

Channel/freq. CH Entry/search 01 Programme number 01 TV channel name BBC1 Decoder Off TV system PAL-BG NICAM On Fine tuning 0

To store

Press OK

Manual search with EasyLink

With 'Easy Link', the DVD recorder will automatically download the TV channels stored on the TV set. This is why some lines have no function. To store new TV channels, they must first be stored on the TV set. The information will then be transferred to the DVD recorder automatically.

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .

3 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar

appears.

4 Select '

5 Select 'Installation' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C .

6 Select 'Manual search' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with

7 In 'Channel/freq.', select the desired display using C .

8 In 'Entry/search', enter the frequency or channel of the TV station

9 Using D or C in 'Programme number', select the programme

' symbol with D or C .

C .

'Freq.'(Frequency), 'CH'(Channel), 'S-CH'(Special/hyperband channel)

using the number buttons 0..9 .

aI don't know the channel for my TV station

b In this case, press C to start the automatic search. A changing channel

number/frequency number will appear on the TV screen. Continue the automatic search until you have found the TV channel you are looking for.

number you want to use for the TV channel, e.g. '01'.

Tip

Problem

ENGLISH

How can I change the TV system of the TV channel?

In 'TV system', use D or C to select the TV system that produces the least distortion of picture and sound.

What is NICAM?

NICAM is a digital sound transmission system. Using NICAM, you can transmit either 1 stereo channel or 2 separate mono channels. However, if reception is poor and the sound distorted you can turn off NICAM. In 'NICAM', select 'Off' using D or C .

How can I improve the automatic process for storing channels?

To change the automatic process for storing channels (fine tuning), select 'Fine tuning'. Using D or C you can try to fine-tune the TV channelmanually.

0 Press OK to store the TV channel.

A To search for other TV channels, begin again at

B To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

Tip

Sorting TV channels automatically (Follow TV)

When the automatic channel search function is activated, the TV channels are stored in a specific order. This may differ from the order in which the TV channels appear on your TV set. This function changes the order of the TV channels stored in your DVD recorder to match the order on the TV set. This only works if the DVD recorder ( EXT 1 TO TV-I/O socket) and the TV set are

connected with a scart cable.

What does EasyLink do?

If your TV set supports 'Easylink,..', TV channels will be stored during initial installation in the same order as they appear on the TV set. To store the TV channels in a different order, you'll need to change the order on the TV set. When you start the Follow TV function the information is transferred again from the TV set.

Directions For Use

Installing your DVD recorder

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

Installing your DVD recorder

EN 17DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Page 18

2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .

3 Press the SYSTEM-MENU button on the remote control. The menu

bar appears.

4 Select '

5 Select 'Installation' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C .

6 Select line 'Follow TV' with CH- B or CH+ A . and confirm with

7 Confirm the message on the screen with OK .'TV 01' will appear in

' symbol with D or C .

the C button.

the DVD recorder display.

ENGLISH

Automatic TV channel search

During installation, all available TV channels are searched for and stored. If the channel assignments of your cable or satellite TV provider change or if you are reinstalling the DVD recorder, e.g. after moving house, you can start this procedure again. This will replace the stored TV channels with the new ones.

EN 18 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

TV 01

TV 02

8 Select programme number '1' on the TV set.

aI cannot switch my TV set to programme number '1'

b If you have connected additional devices to the EXT 2 AUX-I/O socket,

please disconnect these devices. Other connected devices may have switched the TV set to the programme number of the scart socket.

9 Confirm with OK on the DVD recorder remote control.

'WAIT' will appear in the display. The DVD recorder compares the TV channels on the TV set and the DVD recorder. If the DVD recorder finds the same TV channel as on the TV set it stores it at 'P01'.

a'NOTV' will appear in the display. The DVD recorder is not

receiving a video signal from the TV set.

b Chech the connectors at both ends of the scart cable. b Check your TV's operating instructions to see which scart socket is used

for video signals.

b If the problem persists, you won't be able to use this feature.

Please read 'Adding and clearing TV channels manually'.

0 Wait until for example 'TV 02' appears in the display.

A Select the next programme number on the TV set, e.g. '2'.

B Confirm with OK on the DVD recorder remote control.

Deleting sorting

You can delete incorrect TV channel sorting by pressing D .

C Repeat steps0toBuntil you have assigned all the TV channels.

À To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

Problem

Tip

Installation

Autom. search

Searching for TV channels

00 Channels found

Please wait

What does Easy Link do?

With Easylink, you can search for and store TV channels only on the TV set. These settings are accepted by the DVD recorder. Use this function to start the transfer of TV channels from the TV set.

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .

3 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar

appears.

4 Select '

5 Select 'Installation' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C .

6 Select 'Autom. search' using CH- B or CH+ A .

7 Press C .

8 The automatic TV channel search starts. This allows the DVD

9 When all the TV channels have been found, 'Autom. search

0 To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

You can read about how to search for a TV channel manually in 'Manual TV channel search'.

' symbol with D or C .

recorder to save all available TV channels. This procedure may take several minutes.

complete' will appear on the TV screen.

Directions For Use

Installing your DVD recorder

Page 19

Installation

Sort TV channels

...

• P01 BBC1 P02 BBC2 P03 ITV P04 P05 P06 ...

To sort Press ›

To exit press SYSTEM MENU

Adding and clearing TV channels manually

After you have performed the automatic channel search you may not agree with the sequence in which the individual TV channels have been allocated to the programme positions (programme numbers). You can use this function to rearrange the TV channels already stored or to delete TV channels you don't want or those with poor reception.

EasyLink

With Easylink, you can search for and store TV channels only on the TV set. These settings are then accepted by the DVD recorder. That is why you cannot select this function manually.

The teletext clock resets automatically

If you store a TV channel which transmits TXT/PDC on programme number 'P01', the date and time will automatically be transmitted and constantly updated. As a result, the changes from summer time to winter time and back again will be made automatically.

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Switch on the DVD recorder. Press the SYSTEM-MENU button on

the remote control. The menu bar appears.

3 Select '

4 Select 'Installation' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C .

5 Select 'Sort TV channels' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm

6 Using CH- B or CH+ A select the TV channel that you want to

7 Confirm with C .

8 Using CH- B or CH+ A , shift the TV channel to the desired

9 Repeat steps

0 To store, press OK .

A To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

' symbol with D or C .

with C .

delete or whose order you want to change.

Deleting TV channels

Unwanted channels or those with poor reception can be deleted using

CLEAR . Proceed at step 6.

position and press the D button. The DVD recorder will insert the TV channel.

6to8

channels you want.

until you have resorted/deleted all the TV

Tip

ENGLISH

Audio Language English

Recording audio Language 1

Subtitle English

Menu English

Country Other

Setting the language/country

You can select the country and, for DVD playback, the language for the subtitles and the audio language. Please note that with some DVDs the audio language and/or subtitle language can be changed only via the DVD menu. For bilingual shows you can also select the sound channel of the TV station for recording. You also have the option of setting one of the displayed languages for the on-screen menu (OSD). However, the DVD recorder display will only display English text regardless of this setting.

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .

3 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar

appears.

4 Select '

5 Select line 'Language' with CH- B or CH+ A . and confirm with

6 Select the appropriate line and confirm with C .

Language

7 Select the appropriate setting using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm

8 To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

' symbol with D or C .

the C button.

Which settings can I choose?

'Audio Language' : Playback language (audio language) 'Recording audio' : Type of audio recording 'Language 1'or'Language

'Subtitle' : Subtitle language 'Menu': Language of the OSD menu 'Country' : Location (country)

with OK .

Switching over audio recording (2channel sound)

Some TV programmes transmit an extra audio signal in stereo in addition to the normal audio signal (2-channel sound). In most cases this means that an additional language is available. If a TV programme is available in, say, English and German, German may be available as the second language. To record TV programmes in stereo or 2-channel sound you can select Stereo or the language you want as the default setting. This setting does not become active until the sound of a TV programme is transmitted in 2-channel sound. When you play back the recording you can play back the sound only in the language you used for the recording.

Directions For Use

Tip

EN 19DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Installing your DVD recorder

Page 20

EN 20 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

Audio Language English

Recording audio Language 1

Subtitle English

Menu English

Country Other

Installation

Time/Date

Time 20:00 Year 2003 Month 01 Date 01

To exit press SYSTEM MENU

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .

3 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar

appears.

4 Select '

5 Select line 'Language' with CH- B or CH+ A . and confirm with

6 Select line 'Recording audio' and confirm with C .

Language

7 Select 'Language 1'or'Language 2' with CH- B or CH+ A and

8 To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

' symbol with D or C .

the C button.

confirm with OK .

Setting the time and date

If the display shows an incorrect time or '--:--', the time and date must be reset manually. If a TV channel which transmits TXT/PDC (teletext/PDC) is stored under programme number 'P01', the time and date will automatically be taken from the TXT/PDC information.

1 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar

appears.

2 Select '

3 Select 'Installation' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C .

4 Select 'Time/Date' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C .

5 Check if the time in 'Time' is correct. If required, change the time

6 Check 'Year', 'Month' and 'Date' in the same way. To move between

7 Check the displayed settings and confirm with OK .

8 To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

' symbol with D or C .

with the number buttons 0..9 on your remote control.

the fields, use CH- B or CH+ A .

'Stored' will appear briefly on the screen.

ENGLISH

Onscreen information

You can check or change many of the functions and settings of your DVD recorder via the system menu bar. The menu bar cannot be displayed during recording.

Symbols in the menu bar

Press SYSTEM-MENU to open and close the menu bar (main menu). Use D and C to select the relevant function. Use CH- B to confirm the function and go either to another menu or execute the function directly. Some functions may not be available, depending on the disc inserted.

Menu bar 1

A B C D E F G

Menu bar 2

While menu bar 1 is being displayed you can go to menu bar 2 by pressing C again.

H I J K L

User preferences

Title/track

Chapter/index

Audio language

Subtitle language

Camera angle

Zoom

Sound

Frame advance

Slow motion

Fast forward

Search by time

Directions For Use

Installing your DVD recorder

On-screen information

Page 21

Field for temporary messages

Operating mode symbols

The top left corner of the menu line contains a field for temporary messages relating to the various operating modes. This information appears briefly on the screen when certain disc functions have been activated:

           

Shuffle

Scan

Repeat entire disc

Repeat title

Repeat track

Repeat chapter

Repeat from A to the end

Repeat from A to B

Camera angle

Child lock enabled

Resume playback

Illegal action

Status field

The status field shows the current operating mode (status) of the DVD recorder and the type of disc inserted. This display can be disabled.

Disc type symbols

M W N O P Q

DVD+RW

DVD+R

DVDVideo

VideoCD

No disc

Error

ENGLISH

R S T U V X Y Z

Recording

Stop

Playback

PlaybackPause

RecordPause

Search forwards (8x speed)

Search backwards (8x speed)

Slow motion

Tuner information box

This field is located in the bottom left-hand corner of the screen. The aerial signal, the TV channel and the TV channel name for the selected programme are displayed.

a b

Current channel/selected input socket

No signal

The TV channel is not available/the additional device is not connected or it is switched off

Copyprotected signal

Timer information box

This box appears above the tuner information box. When a timer recording is set, it shows the timer icon and the start time or date of the first programme to be recorded. If no timer recording is scheduled, the current time is displayed. This box disappears during playback of a disc or after a recording starts.

f g h

Timer starts on the day shown

OTR recording runs until the stop time displayed

Current time

No timer event programmed

Directions For Use

On-screen information

EN 21DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

On-screen information

Page 22

EN 22 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

playback

OPENING P01

General notes on playback

With this DVD recorder you can play back the following systems:

•) DVD Video

•) (Super)Video CD Disc

•) DVD+RW Disc

•) DVD+R Disc

•) DVD-RW (video mode, finalised)

•) DVD-R

•) CD-R

•) CD-RW

•) Audio CD

•) MP3 CD You can operate the video recorder using the remote control or the buttons on the front of the DVD recorder.

aThe display will read 'PIN'

b The child lock has been activated for the inserted disc. Read the sections

on 'Child lock' and 'Releasing a disc' in the chapter on 'Access control (child lock).

The menu on the screen is showing an 'X'

b Some DVD discs can be manufactured so that certain steps are required

before the disc can be played, or so that only limited operation is possible during playback. When an 'X' appears on the screen the selected feature is not possible.

The screen is showing regional code information

b Since DVD films are not normally released in all parts of the world at the

same time, all DVD players have a specific regional code. Discs can be given a regional code. If the regional codes differ between the player and the disc, playback is not possible.

b The regional code is shown on the label on the back of the machine. b The regional code does not apply to recordable DVD discs.

Problem

Inserting a disc

1 Press the OPEN/CLOSE J button on the front. The disc tray will

open. While the disc tray is opening, 'OPENING' and then 'TRAY OPEN' when the tray is fully open.

2 Carefully place the disc in the tray with the label facing up and press

PLAY G or OPEN/CLOSE J .'CLOSING' and then 'READING' will

appear in the display. The information on the disc will be read.

How do I insert a doublesided DVD?

Double-sided discs do not have labelling over the whole surface. The labelling for each side is in the centre of the disc. To play a side its label must be facing up.

ENGLISH

C01 2:04

Opening/closing the tray using the remote control

You can open and close the disc tray using the remote control. Press and hold the STOP h button on the remote control until the dialog box shows 'OPENING'or'CLOSING'.

3 Playback starts automatically.

A menu may appear when a DVD is played back. If the titles and chapters are numbered, press a number button on the remote control. You can also use the D , C , CH+ A ,

CH- B buttons or number buttons 0..9 to select a menu item and confirm with OK .

You can also access the menu using DISC-MENU on the remote control. For further information see 'Playing a DVD video disc'.

When a DVD+RW is played back the index overview appears. Using CH- B , CH+ A , N ,

O select the title you want to play back.

Confirm with OK . For further information see 'Playing back a DVD+RW/+R Disc'.

If playback does not start automatically, press PLAY G . For further information see ' Playing an audio CD'.

If the 'h' symbol appears in the display, start playback by pressing PLAY G . If a menu appears on the screen, use the remote control buttons indicated on the screen to select the menu option you want (PREV= N , NEXT= O ) or with the number buttons 0..9 . For further information see ' Playing a (Super) Video CD'.

Tip

Playing a DVD video disc

1 If playback does not start automatically, press PLAY G .

This will appear on the display: title, chapter, elapsed time.

2 To stop playback, press STOP h on the remote control or h on

the DVD recorder.

3 To eject the disc, press OPEN/CLOSE J on the front of the DVD

recorder.

Directions For Use

playback

Page 23

Playing a DVD+RW/ +R disc

Playing an MP3 CD

C01 ANNA P01

1 If the disc is write-protected or a finalised DVD+R disc, playback

starts automatically.

2 If playback does not start automatically, use the CH- B or

CH+ A button to select the title you want to play on the index

screen. You can also use the N or O button on the front.

3 Press the PLAY G button.

This will appear on the display: title number, recording quality.

aI can see the message 'EMPTYDISC'

b The disc does not contain any recordings.

4 To stop playback, press STOP h on the remote control or h on

the DVD recorder.

5 To eject the disc, press OPEN/CLOSE J on the front of the DVD

recorder.

What should I note when playing back different recording types (qualities)?

The correct recording quality 'M1, M2, M2x, M3, M4, M6' will automatically be selected during playback. For more information see the section on 'Selecting the recording type (quality)' in the chapter on 'Manual recording'.

Playing an audio CD

You can also use the DVD recorder to play audio CDs

1 Insert an audio CD. Playback starts automatically.

Audio CD display'

If the TV is on, the audio CD screen appears automatically.

During playback, the current track number and its elapsed playing time will show on the TV screen and on the recorder display.

2 Stop playback using STOP h . The number of tracks and the total

time are displayed.

Problem

Tip

ENGLISH

MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer-3) files are highly compressed music files. Using this technology the data volume can be compressed by a factor of 10. This means it is possible to record 10 hours of music in CD quality on a single CD-ROM.

When creating MP3 CDs please note the following:

File system: ISO9660 Directory structure: maximum of 8 levels Formats: *.mp3 Filenames: maximum of 12 characters (8+3) Maximum of 32 albums, 999 titles Supported sampling frequencies: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz). Music with sampling frequencies other than these will be skipped. Supported bit rates: 32, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256 (kbit/s) ID3 Tag: Version 1, 1.1. In later versions the directory name is displayed as the album and the filename as the title.

Important notes for playback:

Only the first session of a multi-session CD will play back.

1 Insert an MP3 CD. Playback starts automatically.

MP3 CD display

If the TV is on, the MP3 CD screen appears automatically.

During playback, the current track number and its elapsed playing time will show on the TV screen and on the recorder display. During stopped playback ( STOP h button) the numbers of the albums will show on the TV screen and on the display.

Further information on the album, track and artist will also be displayed if included in the ID tag.

2 Stop playback using STOP h . The number of albums is displayed in

the display.

Additional playback features

Using N or O select the next or previous title.

You can also use the T/C button to select titles and albums.

Press the T/C button and use the C or D button to select the 'T' symbol for title or 'C' for chapter.

Use the CH- B or CH+ A buttons or the number buttons 0..9 on the remote control to select the number of the title/chapter.

You can also use the repeat functions ( PLAY MODE button).

Tip

Directions For Use

playback

EN 23DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

playback

Page 24

EN 24 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

Playing a (Super) Video CD

(Super) Video CDs may be equipped with PBC (Play Back Control). This means that special playback functions (menus) can be directly selected. The video CD must be PBC compatible (see CD case). 'PBC' is active in the default settings.

1 Insert a (Super) Video CD.

If the 'h' symbol appears in the display, start playback by pressing

PLAY G .

2 If a menu appears on the screen, use the remote control buttons

indicated on the screen to select the menu option you want (PREV= N , NEXT= O ) or with the number buttons 0..9 . If a PBC menu consists of a list of titles, you can select a title directly.

3 Use RETURN to go back to the previous menu

4 Stop playback using STOP h .

ENGLISH

Additonal playback features

Changing to another title/chapter

If there is more than one title or chapter on a disc you can change to another title or chapter as follows. However if there are several chapters within a title, these will be selected. The title can then still be selected via the menu bar.

1 During playback, press O to go to the next title/chapter. Press

N to return to the start of the current title/chapter. Press N twice to return to the start of the previous title/chapter.

Use the T/C (title/chapter) button

Press T/C (title/chapter) and then use CH+ A or CH- B to select the appropriate title. Make sure the symbol 'T' (title) is selected in the menu bar.

Use T/C to select chapters within a title. Press T/C and use C to select the 'C' symbol (chapter). Now select the appropriate chapter with CH+ A or CH- B .

Searching a disc

You can search the disc for a recording at 4x, 8x or 32x playback speed. Other speeds can only be selected via the menu bar ('

1 During playback, press and hold N (reverse) or O (forwards) to

switch to the search feature. You can switch between the playback speeds using N / O .

2 To continue playback, press PLAY G twice at your chosen location.

').

Directions For Use

Tip

playback

aNo sound

b The sound is switched off in search mode. This is not a fault in your

machine.

Search feature via menu bar

During playback press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar will appear at the top of the screen.

Select the 'K' symbol using C or D and confirm with CH- B .

You can now use the D or C button to select different forward and backward search speeds.

If necessary, switch the menu bar off with the SYSTEM-MENU button.

To continue playback, press PLAY G twice.

Additonal playback features

Problem

Tip

Page 25

Still picture

3 Enter the start time with the digit keys 0..9 from where playback

should start.

4 Confirm with OK .

C01 2:04

1 During playback, press PAUSE 9 to stop playback and display a still

picture.

Frame advance via menu bar

During a still picture press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar will appear at the top of the screen.

Select the 'I' symbol using C or D and confirm with CH- B .

You can now use the D or C button to go forwards or backwards one frame at a time.

If necessary, switch the menu bar off with the SYSTEM-MENU button.

2 To continue playback, press PLAY G .

Slow motion

1 During playback press PAUSE 9 on the remote control. Now hold

down N or O to switch to slow motion.

2 You can switch between different speeds using N or O .

Slow motion via menu bar

During playback press PAUSE 9 and then SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar will appear at the top of the screen.

Select the 'J' symbol using C or D and confirm with CH- B .

You can now use the D or C button to select different forward and backward slow motion speeds.

If necessary, switch the menu bar off with the SYSTEM-MENU button.

3 To continue playback, press PLAY G twice.

Search by time

Using this feature you can select where playback should start (select elapsed time).

1 During playback press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The

menu bar will appear at the top of the screen.

2 Select the '

Playback is stopped and a box appears on the screen showing the elapsed time.

' symbol using C or D and confirm with CH- B .

Tip

ENGLISH

aThe time entered will flash on the screen

b The selected title is shorter than the time entered. Enter a new time or

cancel the function by pressing SYSTEM-MENU .

5 Playback starts at the time you entered.

Problem

Repeat/Shuffle play

You can mark entire sections or the whole disc for endless playback. Depending on the type of disc (DVD video, DVD+RW, video CD) you can select a chapter, title or the entire disc.

1 Select the desired chapter, title or the entire disc and start playback.

2 During playback, press PLAY MODE . By pressing PLAY

MODE again you can chose from the following options:

•) '

': repeat chapter (DVD only)



': repeat track/title

•) '



': repeat entire disc (Video CD, Audio CD only)

•) '



': Shuffle

•) '



•) Display disappears: no repeat

3 To end the repeat, press the STOP h button.

You can also keep pressing the PLAY MODE button until the displays disappear.

Repeating a passage (AB)

You can repeat a particular passage within a title/chapter. You need to indicate the start and end of the passage.

1 During playback press PAUSE 9 at the start point.

You will see a still picture.

2 Keep pressing PLAY MODE until '

The start point is now saved. Press PLAY G to start playback.

3 When the end point is reached press OK .'

TV screen. Playback now takes place within these points.

4 To end the repeat, press the STOP h button.

You can also keep pressing the PLAY MODE button until the displays disappear.

' appears on the screen.



' appears on the



Directions For Use

EN 25DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Additonal playback features

Page 26

Scan feature

EN 26 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

6 Confirm with OK .

7 To stop the feature, press PLAY G and then SYSTEM-MENU .

This feature plays back the first 10 seconds of each chapter (DVD) or track (CD).

1 During playback, press PLAY MODE . Select '

MODE .

2 After 10 seconds the DVD recorder switches to the next

chapter/index. To start playback at the relevant chapter/index press

STOP h and then PLAY G .



' using PLAY

Camera angle

If a DVD contains scenes that have been shot from different camera angles you can select these camera angles for playback.

1 During playback, press PAUSE 9 . You will see a still picture.

2 Press SYSTEM-MENU and select the '

aThe 'F' symbol will be hidden

b The selected scene has been shot from only one camera angle. This feature

is therefore not available. For more information please read the cover of your DVD disc.

3 Select the required camera angle with CH- B or CH+ A . You can

also directly enter the number with the number buttons 0..9 .

4 After a short time, playback will resume from the new camera angle.

The '

' symbol will remain visible until a scene starts for which

there is only one camera angle.

' icon using C .

Problem

Zoom feature

The Zoom feature allows you to enlarge the video image and pan through the enlarged image.

ENGLISH

Select the audio language

Many pre-recorded DVD discs have more than one audio language. The language initially selected for playback will be the one you selected when you first set up the DVD recorder. However you can change the audio language of the inserted disc at any time. You can change the audio language either using the menu of the inserted disc ( DISC-MENU button) or the AUDIO button. The audio languages for DVD playback in the two menus may be different. Please note that with some DVDs the audio language and/or subtitle language can be changed only via the DVD menu.

1 During playback press AUDIO .

2 Select the required audio language using CH- B or CH+ A . You

can also enter the number directly using the number buttons 0..9 .

3 Play continues in the new audio language.

Subtitles

Many pre-recorded DVD discs have more than one subtitle language. The language initially selected for playback will be the one you selected when you first set up the DVD recorder. However you can change the subtitle language of the inserted disc at any time. You can change the subtitle language either using the menu of the inserted disc ( DISC-MENU button) or the menu bar ( SYSTEM-MENU button). The subtitle languages in the menus may differ.

1 During playback press SYSTEM-MENU and select the '

using C .

2 Select the required subtitle language using CH- B or CH+ A . You

can also enter the number directly using the number buttons 0..9 . You can switch off subtitles again with 0 or by pressing 'off'.

3 Playback continues in the new subtitle language.

' icon

Directions For Use

Additonal playback features

1 During playback, press PAUSE 9 . The DVD recorder switches to

'PAUSE'. You will see a still picture.

2 Press SYSTEM-MENU and select the '

3 Select the required zoom factor using CH- B or CH+ A .

4 When 'press OK to pan' appears on the screen, the zoom process

is complete.

5 Press OK . Using CH+ A , CH- B , C , D select the part of the

image you wish to view.

' icon using C .

Additonal playback features

Page 27

Manual recording

General

Which discs can I use for recording?

With this DVD recorder, you can record on two types of DVD:

DVD+RW

This disc can be written to and then the contents deleted.

DVD+R

This type of disc can only be recorded once. If you want to play this DVD in a DVD player it must be finalized using the 'Finalise disc' function. It is not possible to make further recordings using this disc. If this disc is to be played in a DVD recorder it must not be finalised. Recordings can be added and deleted. The disc space (playback time) from the deleted recording cannot be recovered for further recordings

Use the 'Manual recording' function to spontaneously start recording (e.g. to record a TV show already in progress). In the 'index display' select the title to be overwritten or 'Empty title' with CH- B , CH+ A . If you insert recordings between existing recordings, check the lengths of the old and new recordings. If the new recording is too long the subsequent recording (title/chapter) will be overwritten.

Insert new recordings at the end of all existing recordings (Safe Record)

To add a new recording at the end of the last recording on the disc, hold down the REC/OTR n button until the message 'SAFE REC' appears on the display.

For DVD+R discs each new recording is always added at the end of all previous recordings as existing recordings cannot be overwritten.

End of disc is reached

If the end of a disc is reached during recording, recording will stop and the Recorder will turn itself off automatically.

Please refer to section 'Recording without automatic switchoff', if you want to manually start and stop your own recording.

If you want to start a recording manually but have it stopped automatically, read the section 'Recording with automatic switchoff'. (e.g. not to record to the end of the disc)

Read the section 'Automatic recording from a satellite receiver', if you want a recording to be controlled automatically by a satellite receiver.

Read the section 'Direct record' if you want to record a programme currently being shown.

Tip

ENGLISH

1 FREETITLE P01

Recording without automatic switchoff

1 Switch on the TV set and select the programme number for the DVD

recorder.

2 Insert a disc on which the recording is to be made. This disc is then

checked for content and system. READING' will appear on the display.

aIndex display

b A DVD+RW disc has been inserted that already contains recordings. Use

the CH+ A or CH- B button to select the point where the recording is to start.

The message 'EMPTYDISC' appears in the display

b The disc inserted is a blank DVD disc.

A dialog box appears asking you whether you want to delete the

contents or eject the disc

b The disc inserted is a DVD+RW but its contents are not DVD

video-compatible (e.g. a data disc). Recordings on this disc can only be made if the entire disc is first deleted with the REC/OTR n button.

The message 'Title limit' appears on the screen if a recording is to be made

b A disc may contain a maximum of 48 titles (including blank titles). Delete

titles or change the disc.

3 If necessary, use the MONITOR button on the remote control to

switch to the internal tuner in the DVD recorder.

4 Use CH+ A or CH- B to select the programme number (station

name) you want to record. This will appear on the display:

Programme numbers of the external inputs: 'EXT1' Scart socket at the back EXT 1 TO TV-I/O

'EXT2' Scart socket at the back EXT 2 AUX-I/O

'CAM1' Front SVHS/audio sockets S-VIDEO / left AUDIO right

'CAM1' Front video/audio sockets A/V S-VIDEO / left AUDIO right

Switching between the S-VIDEO and VIDEO sockets takes place automatically. If both sockets are in use, the signal at the

S-VIDEO socket has priority.

'CAM2' Digital Video (i Link) front socket DV IN

5 To start recording, press REC/OTR n on the remote control or

RECORD on the DVD recorder.

If you want to start the recording at the end of the existing recordings, hold down the REC/OTR n button until the message 'SAFE REC' appears on the display. For DVD+R discs each new recording is always added at the end of all previous recordings as existing recordings cannot be overwritten. This will, for example, appear in the display:

Problem

Tip

Directions For Use

EN 27DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Manual recording

Page 28

EN 28 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

C01 1:16:51 P01

Insert chapter markers

During recording you can mark scenes so you can find them or hide them later. During recording, press FSS & at the start point. 'Inserting marker' appears on the TV screen. In the display, the number of the 'CHAPTER' increases by one. For further information on titles and chapters, see the section on 'Changing to another title/chapter' in 'Playback'.

6 Use the STOP h button on the remote control or h on the

machine to stop the recording. 'MENU UPDT' will appear on the display. The DVD recorder is writing the list of contents. Wait until the message disappears from the display. The recording is then complete.

aThe display will read 'DISC ERR'

b Recording could not be completed correctly because of a disc error. Check

the disc and clean it if necessary.

Making recordings on DVD+R discs compatible

If you want to play back the recording on a DVD player, you need to finalise the disc in the DVD recorder. You can prepare your DVD for use in a DVD player using the 'Finalising' feature. See 'Finalising DVD+R discs' in 'Managing the disc contents'.

Interrupt recording (Pause)

1 During recording press PAUSE 9 , for example to avoid recording

the commercials.

2 To continue recording, press REC/OTR n .

End recording

To end the recording, press the STOP h button. Wait until 'MENU UPDT' disappears from the display.

Tip

Problem

Tip

ENGLISH

Recording with automatic switchoff (OTR onetouchrecording)

1 Insert a disc.

2 If necessary, use the MONITOR button on the remote control to

switch to the internal tuner in the DVD recorder.

3 Use CH+ A or CH- B to select the programme number (channel

name) you want to record.

4 Press REC/OTR n on the remote control.

5 Each time you press REC/OTR n you will add 30 minutes to the

recording time.

How can I cancel the recording time I have just entered?

To delete an entry, press CLEAR while the display shows the recording time.

Preventing accidental erasing of discs

To ensure you don't accidentally delete a recording you can protect the entire disc. You can only ever protect the entire disc. You cannot protect individual recordings.

What happens with DVD+R discs?

As long as these discs are not finalised, they can be protected against accidental erasure in the same way as DVD+RW discs.

1 Insert the disc to be protected.

2 While the index screen is displayed press STOP h on the remote

control. The first title is highlighted.

3 Press CH+ A . This takes you to the disc info screen.

4 Press the C button.

Select the 'Protection' line. Confirm with C .

5 Select 'Protected' with the CH- B button and confirm with OK .

6 Press D and then DISC-MENU to terminate.

Directions For Use

Manual recording

Page 29

The entire disc is now protected. If an attempt is made to record on a protected disc, 'DISC LOCK' will appear on the display and 'Disc locked' will appear on the screen.

Lining up recordings within a title (assemble cut)

On a recorded DVD+RW disc you can add another recording to an existing title. This recording is added to the title as a 'chapter'. The existing information will be overwritten starting from this point. Titles will also be overwritten that follow the current title depending on the length of the new recording. The recording type (Quality) will be taken from the current title. To play back this recording, press SYSTEM-MENU and use the C button to select the 'C' (Chapter) symbol. You can also use the T/C key.

For further information, see 'Changing to another title/chapter' in 'Playback'.

What happens with DVD+R discs?

New recordings on 'DVD+R' discs can only be added after existing recordings. It is not possible to overwrite existing recordings on 'DVD+R' discs.

1 In the index display, find the title to which the new recording is to be

added.

2 Look at the last minute of the old recording (playback)

3 Press PAUSE 9 on the remote control at the position where the

new recording is to go. '9' will appear on the screen.

4 To monitor the recording you can press MONITOR to switch to the

internal tuner.

5 Now start recording as usual by pressing REC/OTR n on the

remote control. The new recording will be inserted.

6 Stop recording with STOP h .

ENGLISH

Selecting the recording type (Quality)

You can select the picture quality of the recording using the recording quality feature and hence the maximum recording time per disc. You can check the quality by changing the recording mode and then watching the picture from the built-in tuner ( MONITOR button). During playback, the correct picture quality will automatically be selected.

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

Select the record mode with the button REC MODE on the remote control.

Which recording types can I choose?

'M1': High Quality offers the best picture quality and a recording time of 1

hour.

'M2': Standard Play (pre-recorded DVD quality) offers standard picture quality and a recording time of 2 hours.

'M2x': Standard Play plus (better than S-VHS quality) offers standard picture quality and a recording time of 2.5 hours.

'M3': Long Play (S-VHS picture quality). Recording time of 3 hours.

'M4': Extended Play (better than VHS picture quality). Recording time of 4

hours.

'M6': Super Long Play (VHS picture quality). Recording time of 6 hours.

Can I select the recording type via a menu as well?

Press the SYSTEM-MENU button.

Select 'A' symbol with D or C .

Select 'Record settings' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with

C .

In the line 'Record mode' select the recording type with D or C .

Confirm using OK and SYSTEM-MENU .

If you have selected the recording mode 'M3', 'M4'or'M6', you can select the settings 'Stndrd' (Standard) or 'Sport' (for rapid movements) in the 'Filter mode' line.

Tip

Directions For Use

Manual recording

EN 29DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Manual recording

Page 30

EN 30 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

Automatic recording from a satellite receiver (Sat recording)

You can use this function if you own a satellite receiver that can control other devices via a scart cable and a programming function (timer). For more information, please see the operating instructions for the satellite receiver.

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar

appears.

3 Select '

4 Select 'Record settings' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with

5 Select 'Sat record' using CH- B or CH+ A .

6 Select 'EXT2' with D or C .

7 Confirm with OK .

8 Use a scart cable to connect scart socket EXT 2 AUX-I/O on the

9 To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

0 Insert a disc you want to use for recording.

A Programme the satellite receiver with the required information

B Switch off the DVD recorder using STANDBY m .'SAT' also

' symbol with D or C .

C .

Switching off 'Sat Recording'

To switch off the function, select 'Off' using C or D .

DVD recorder to the corresponding scart socket on the satellite receiver.

(programme number of the TV channel, start time, end time). If necessary, please see the operating instructions for your satellite receiver.

appears in the display to indicate that the function is active.

Tip

ENGLISH

Direct Record

Can you record the right TV channel in seconds when the DVD recorder is switched off? No problem. If recording is started manually, the switchedoff DVD recorder takes the current TV channel from the TV set via the scart cable. You will find more information on how to switch 'Direct record' on or off in the next section 'Direct record'.

How does Direct Record work?

The DVD recorder compares the TV channel selected on the TV set with its stored TV channels via the scart cable. If the same TV channel is found, it switches the DVD recorder to the corresponding programme number and starts recording.

Please do not change channel on the TV during the search. This could affect the tuning of the DVD recorder.

1 On the TV set, select the programme number you want make the

recording from.

2 Press REC/OTR n with the DVD recorder switched off.

aThe display will read 'WAIT'

b The DVD recorder is comparing its saved TV channels with those of the

TV set. Please do not change the TV channel on the TV set while 'WAIT'is shown in the display.

'NOTV' appears in the display

b This TV channel could not be found in the DVD recorder's memory.

Check that all TV channels saved on the TV set are available on the DVD recorder. If required, save any missing channels. Please read 'Manual TV channel search' in 'Installing your DVD recorder'.

b Check the connectors at both ends of the scart cable. b Check your TV's operating instructions to see which scart socket is used

for video signals.

b If the problem persists, you won't be able to use this feature.

3 Stop recording with STOP h .

Problem

Directions For Use

Manual recording

The DVD recorder is now ready to record. The start and end of the recording is controlled via scart cable EXT 2 AUX-I/O .

Manual recording

Page 31

Managing the disc contents

Switching 'Direct Record' on or off

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar

appears.

3 Select '

4 Select 'Record settings' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with

5 Select 'Direct Record' using CH- B or CH+ A .

6 Select 'On' (Direct Record on) or 'Off' (Direct Record off) using

7 Confirm with OK .

8 To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

9 Switch off with STANDBY m .

' symbol with D or C .

C .

D or C .

ENGLISH

Charly 1 00:29:59 • M1 Fri15/02/2003

Empty title 01:30:01

General

When a recording is made to disc, the following additional information is also stored at the beginning of the recording:

•) Name of the recording If the TV station does not transmit a name, only the channel number and time will be stored as the name

•) Length of the recording

•) Record type (Quality)

•) Date of the recording

•) Index picture of the recording

A marker will be set every 5-6 minutes if the 'Auto chapters' function is activated in the 'Record settings' menu. This marker is known as a 'chapter'. These markers can be changed when the recording has finished.

Can markers be set on a DVD+R disc?

Markers can be set on these discs if they have not been finalised.

It is also possible to add 'chapters' later. This means that scenes you do not want to see during playback, such as commercials, can be hidden or skipped. During playback you can watch your recording as a continuous sequence without the hidden chapters.

Select from the following chapters:

'Favorite Scene Selection', to divide the title into chapters or to manage the chapters.

'Editing recording titles (name)', to change the recording names.

'Play complete title', to play the entire title including the hidden chapters.

'Delete recording/title'to delete the relevant title and therefore also the recording.

'Disc settings'to change the general settings of the disc.

Directions For Use

Manual recording

EN 31DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Managing the disc contents

Page 32

Favorite Scene Selection

EN 32 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

3 Using C select 'hidden'. The picture is shown darker.

Favorite Scene Selection

Insert marker Press OK

Current chapter visible

Delete marker

Delete all markers

New index picture

Divide title

Favorite Scene Selection

Insert marker Press OK

Current chapter visible

Delete marker

Delete all markers

New index picture

Divide title

In this menu you can adapt a title to suit your particular needs. You can insert/delete chapter markers, hide chapters, select a new index, or split up a title. Press FSS & on the remote control during recording to open this menu.

Insert chapter markers

During recording, you can set or delete chapter markers within a title. The maximum number of chapters per disc is 124 and 99 per title. If one of these limits is reached the following message will appear on the screen: 'Chapter limit'. You need to delete some markers before you can insert new ones or make recordings.

1 During playback, press FSS & on the remote control at the

appropriate point. The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu appears on the TV screen.

2 Confirm 'Insert marker' by pressing OK .'Inserting marker'

appears on the TV screen.

'X' will appear on the screen:

This DVD is write-protected or the disc is a finalised DVD-R. Subsequent changes cannot be made.

Press FSS to exit

3 To stop this function, press FSS & .

Hiding chapters

Initially, all the chapters are visible. You can hide chapters for playback (e.g. advertisements) or make them visible again. In editing mode, hidden chapters are shown as dimmed.

1 While the relevant chapter is playing, press FSS & on the remote

control. The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu appears on the TV screen.

How can I select different chapters?

Press the T/C button on the remote control. Titles and chapters are

Press FSS to exit

displayed at the top of the screen.

Select title (T) or chapter (C) with C or D .

Use CH+ A or CH- B to select the title/chapter channel you want to edit.

Tip

ENGLISH

Favorite Scene Selection

Insert marker Press OK

Current chapter visible

Delete marker

Delete all markers

New index picture

Divide title

Switching quickly

You can switch between show chapters ('visible') and hide chapters ('hidden') quickly and easily using SELECT .

4 To end, press FSS & .

During playback this chapter will be skipped. If the chapter is not visible, select 'visible' in step

Deleting chapter markers

Within a title you can delete either all markers or individual markers.

1 While the relevant chapter is playing, press FSS & on the remote

control. The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu appears on the TV screen.

How can I select different chapters?

Press the T/C button on the remote control. Titles and chapters are

Press FSS to exit

displayed at the top of the screen.

Select title (T) or chapter (C) with C or D .

Use CH+ A or CH- B to select the title/chapter channel you want to edit.

2 Use CH- B to select either 'Delete marker ' for this chapter or

'Delete all markers' for all chapters within the selected title.

3 Confirm with OK .

4 To end, press FSS & .

Tip

with C .

Directions For Use

Tip

Managing the disc contents

2 Select 'Current chapter' using CH- B .

Managing the disc contents

Page 33

Changing the index picture

Editing recording titles (name)

Favorite Scene Selection

Insert marker Press OK

Current chapter visible

Delete marker

Delete all markers

New index picture

Divide title

Favorite Scene Selection

Insert marker Press OK

Current chapter visible

Delete marker

Delete all markers

New index picture

Divide title

Normally the first picture of a recording is used as the index picture. You can however choose any picture from the recording as the index picture.

1 During playback, search for location of the new index picture. Press

the PAUSE 9 button.

2 Press the FSS & button. The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu

appears on the TV screen.

3 Select line 'New index picture' and confirm with OK .

4 Start the change with OK .'Updating menu' appears on the TV

screen.

Press FSS to exit

Once the revision has been completed successfully the DVD recorder reverts to the index overview.

Splitting titles

You can split a title into several sections (titles) of any size. Each of these sections (titles) is identified by its own index.

Note: This split cannot be undone.

Can I split titles on DVD+R discs?

As recordings on DVD+R discs cannot be overwritten, it is not possible to split titles.

1 While the relevant title is playing, press FSS & on the remote

control. The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu appears on the TV screen.

2 Select 'Divide title' and confirm with the OK button.

3 If you are sure, press OK to start the process. 'Dividing title'

appears on the TV screen.

Press FSS to exit

4 Wait until the new title is displayed with an index picture in the index

picture overview.

Some TV stations transmit the title (name) of a programme. In this case, the name will be included automatically (e.g. 'ROCKY'). Otherwise, the only the programme number (programme name) and the time are stored as the name of the recording. The name of the recording can only be changed after the recording has been completed.

ENGLISH

Settings for title Charly 1

Name Charly1

Play full title

Erase this title

1 Press the STOP h button or during playback press DISC-MENU .

2 Using CH+ A or CH- B select the title whose name you want to

edit and confirm with C . The menu for editing names appears.

3 Select 'Name' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with C .

4 Using C or D select the position where the letter/number/icon is to

be changed/re-entered.

5 Change the icon using CH+ A or CH- B . You can switch between

upper and lowercase using SELECT . You can delete the character using CLEAR .

6 Repeat

7 Save the new name with OK .'Storing name' appears on the TV

and5until you have made the changes you want.

screen for confirmation.

Directions For Use

8 To end, press D .

Playing the entire title

If you have hidden certain sections (chapters) of a title, this setting lets you watch the entire title including the hidden sections. To do this, proceed as follows:

Settings for title Charly 1

Name Charly1

Play full title Press OK

Erase this title

1 Press the STOP h button or during playback press DISC-MENU .

2 Using CH+ A or CH- B select the title you want to play all of and

confirm with C . The title editing menu will appear.

3 Select 'Play full title' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with

OK .

4 Playback starts automatically. The title is played in its entirety -

including the hidden chapters.

Managing the disc contents

The process of splitting the title is now complete.

EN 33DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Managing the disc contents

Page 34

EN 34 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

Settings for title Charly 1

Name Charly1

Play full title

Erase this title PressOK

Philips1 00:35:59 used Fri15/02/2003

PAL

DVD playback

Deleting recordings/titles

You can delete specific recordings from a disc. To do this, proceed as follows:

1 Press the STOP h button or during playback press DISC-MENU .

2 Using CH+ A or CH- B select the title you want to delete and

confirm with C . The title editing menu will appear.

3 Select 'Erase this title' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with

OK .'This will completely erase this title' appears on the TV

screen.. 'Press OK to confirm'.

4 If you want to delete this title, press OK to confirm. Otherwise press

D .

5 'Erasing title' appears on the TV screen.

6 At this point 'Empty title' appears in the 'index picture display'. A

new recording can now be made here. If the deleted title was very short (less than 1 minute) 'Empty title' will not appear at this point.

Can titles be deleted from a DVD+R disc?

Titles on DVD+R discs are only marked as deleted. 'Deleted title' will appear in the display instead of 'Empty title'. During playback the 'deleted' title is skipped. The space used for this title cannot be used again as the title has not been physically deleted. Once the disc has been finalised no further changes can be made.

Disc settings

This screen appears beforethe first title and contains general information about the current disc.

You can:

•) change the name of the disc

•) activate or deactivate write protection on the disc

•) Finish editing (make the disc DVD compatible)

•) finalise a DVD+R

•) delete a DVD+RW

To get to this display, proceed as follows:

ENGLISH

Settings for Philips1

Disc name Philips1

Protection Unprotected

Erase disc

Changing the disc name

1 In the 'Disc info display' press C . The 'Settings for' menu appears

on the TV screen.

2 Select 'Disc name' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with C .

3 Using C or D select the position where the letter/number/icon is to

be changed/re-entered.

4 Change the icon using CH+ A or CH- B . You can switch between

upper and lowercase using SELECT . You can delete the character using CLEAR .

5 Repeat

6 Save the new title with OK .'Storing name' appears on the TV

7 To end, press D .

and4until you have made the changes you want.

screen for confirmation.

Finishing editing

If one or more titles have been edited a DVD player may still display the original titles. You can prepare your disc in such a way that a DVD player will be able to play the edited version.

1 In the 'Disc info display' press C . The 'Settings for' menu appears

on the TV screen.

2 Select 'Make edits compatible' using CH+ A or CH- B and

confirm with OK .

a'Make edits compatible' does not appear

b Your disc is already compatible. There is no need for conversion.

To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

3 The screen displays 'This will take' to show how long the process

will last.

4 To confirm press OK .'Working' appears on the TV screen. A bar

will move from left to right indicating progress.

Problem

Directions For Use

Managing the disc contents

1 Press the STOP h button or during playback press DISC-MENU .

2 Select the first title with CH+ A or press STOP h .

3 Press the CH+ A button. The disc info display will appear.

Managing the disc contents

Page 35

Programming a recording (TIMER)

Settings for Philips1

Disc name Philips1

Protection Unprotected

Erase disc Press OK

Finalising DVD+R discs

This feature is required to play back a DVD+R disc in a DVD player. Once the disc has been finalised no further recordings or changes can be made.

1 In the 'Disc info display' press C . The 'Settings for' menu appears

on the TV screen.

2 Select 'Finalise disc' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with

OK .

a'Finalise disc' does not appear

b Either there is no DVD+R disc inserted or the disc is already finalised.

To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

The 'Settings for' menu does not appear

b The menu may not appear if the disc has been recorded on another DVD

recorder. In this case, use the 'Finalise disc' feature in the ' under 'Features'.

3 The screen displays 'This will take...' to show how long the process

will take.

4 To confirm press OK .'Working' appears on the TV screen. A bar

will move from left to right indicating progress.

' menu,

Problem

Delete DVD+RW disks

1 In the 'Disc info display' press C . The 'Settings for' menu appears

on the TV screen.

2 Select 'Erase disc' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with OK .

'This will erase all titles' appears on the TV screen. Press OK to confirm'.

3 If you want to delete all the titles, press OK to confirm. Otherwise

press D .

4 'Erasing disc' appears on the TV screen.

5 After deletion, the index picture display shows the free space on the

disc.

ENGLISH

General

Use 'Programming a recording (TIMER)', to automatically start and stop a recording at a later date.

The DVD recorder will switch to the right programme number and begin recording at the correct time. With this DVD recorder, you can pre-programme up to six recordings within a period of one month.

To make a programmed recording, your DVD recorder needs to know: * the date you want to make the recording * the programme number of the TV channel * the start and stop time of the recording * VPS or PDC on or off * the recording mode ('M1/M2/M2x/M3/M4/M6')

This information is saved in a 'TIMER block'.

What is 'VPS/PDC'?

'VPS' (Video Programming System)/'PDC' (Programme Delivery Control) are used to control the start and duration of TV channel recordings. If a TV programme starts earlier or ends later than was scheduled, the DVD recorder will then turn on and off at the correct time.

What do I need to know about 'VPS/PDC'?

• Usually the start time is the same as the VPS or PDC time. If a different

'VPS/PDC time' is indicated, e.g.: '20.15 (VPS/PDC 20.14)', the VPS/PDC time '20.14' must be entered exactly to the minute during programming. If you want to programme a time that is different from the VPS or PDC time, you must switch off VPS or PDC.

• Only one TV program of a TV channel can be controlled using 'VPS/PDC' at a

time. If you want to record two or more TV programmes on a TV channel using 'VPS/PDC', you will need to programme these as two separate recordings.

• Since the DVD recorder requires a certain lead time (for getting the disc up to

speed and positioning the laser) before recording can start, it is possible that the recorder will miss the first few seconds of a TV show recorded with VPS/PDC. In this case, disable VPS/PDC and enter a start time one minute earlier.

Directions For Use

Managing the disc contents

EN 35DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Programming a recording (TIMER)

Page 36

EN 36 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

Timer

ShowView system

ShowView number

---------

Mo-Fr/Weekly Press SELECT

Programming recordings with the

ShowView

Thanks to this programming system, you no longer need to tediously enter the date, programme number, start and end times. All the information needed by the DVD recorder for programming is contained in the ShowView most TV listings magazine.

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Press TIMER on the remote control.

The programming method selected last is marked.

3 Select 'ShowView system' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm

with C .

4 Enter the entire ShowView number. This number is up to 9 digits long

and can be found next to the start time of the TV programme in your TV listings magazine. e.g.: 5-312-4 or 5,312 4 Enter 53124 for the ShowView-number. If you make a mistake, you can clear your instructions with CLEAR .

Selecting daily/weekly recordings

Using SELECT , select from the following options:

'Mo-Fr': Repeated daily recordings (Monday to Friday). 'Weekly': Repeated weekly recordings (every week on the same day).

To store

Press OK

5 Confirm with OK .

aThe following message appears on the screen: 'Please enter

programme number'

b The programme number of the TV channel has not yet been assigned to

the ShowView number. Use C , D or the number buttons 0..9 on the remote control to select the appropriate programme number (name) of the TV channel and confirm with OK .

The following message appears on the screen: 'ShowView number

wrong'

b The entered ShowView number is incorrect. Correct your entry or cancel

using the SYSTEM-MENU button.

b Check the time/date (see 'Setting the time & date' in 'Installing your DVD

recorder').

aThe following message appears on the screen: 'Weekend

programming not possible'

b A daily recording was entered for the wrong day. Daily programming can

only be used for recordings to be made from Monday to Friday.

System

programming number. This 9-digit ShowView®number is found in

Tip

Problem

ENGLISH

Timer

ShowView system

Date01Prog.

BBC1

Mo-Fr/Weekly Press SELECT

Start 20:15

VPS PDC End

21:30

6 The decoded data appears after confirmation. You can go back and

Rec Mode M2

To store

Press OK

change the data. Select the appropriate input field with C or D .If required, make changes using CH+ A , CH- B or the number buttons 0..9 .

'Switching on 'VPS/PDC' in the 'Start' input field

Select the 'Start' input field using C . Using SELECT switch on 'VPS/PDC' ('*' lights up). If you press SELECT again, you will switch 'VPS/PDC' off ('*' goes out).

Changing the recording mode in input field 'End'

Select the 'End' input field using C . Use SELECT to select the recording mode 'M1, M2, M2x, M3, M4, M6'.

7 If all information is correct, press the OK button. The programming

information is stored in a TIMER block.

8 To end, press TIMER .

9 Insert a recordable disc (one without write protection).

The disk you have inserted will be checked.

0 Switch the DVD recorder off with STANDBY m .

The programmed recording will only function properly if the DVD recorder has been switched off using the STANDBY m button.

If any of the TIMER blocks are in use, 'TIMER' will light up on the recorder display.

Tip

Directions For Use

Programming a recording (TIMER)

Page 37

Programming recordings without the

ShowView

System

How to change or delete a programmed recording (TIMER)

Timer

Timer programming

Date01Prog.

BBC1

Mo-Fr/Weekly Press SELECT

Start 20:15

VPS PDC End

21:30

Rec Mode M1

To store

Press OK

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Press TIMER on the remote control.

The programming method selected last is marked.

3 Select line 'Timer programming' with CH- B or CH+ A . and

confirm with the C button. The information will appear on the screen.

4 Select the input field with D or C .

5 Enter information with CH- B or CH+ A or with the number

buttons 0..9 .

Selecting daily/weekly recordings

In 'Date' use SELECT to select from the following options:

'Mo-Fr': Repeated daily recordings from Monday to Friday 'Mon': Repeated weekly recordings (every week on the same day, e.g.

Monday).

Programme numbers of the 'EXT1' and 'EXT2'scart socket

You can also programme recordings from external sources via scart socket

EXT 1 TO TV-I/O ('EXT1') or EXT 2 AUX-I/O ('EXT2').

'Switching on 'VPS/PDC' in the 'Start' input field

Select the 'Start' input field using TIMER . Using SELECT switch on 'VPS/PDC' ('*' lights up). If you press SELECT again, you will switch 'VPS/PDC' off ('*' goes out).

Changing the recording quality in input field 'End'

Select the 'End' input field using C . Use SELECT to select the recording mode.

6 If all information is correct, press the OK button. The programming

information is stored in a TIMER block.

7 To end, press TIMER .

8 Insert a DVD (one without write protection).

The disk you have inserted will be checked.

9 Switch off with STANDBY m .

The programmed recording will only function properly if the DVD recorder has been switched off using the STANDBY m button.

Tip

ENGLISH

Timer

Timer List

Date 01

Total record time: 01:15

To change Press ›

Prog. BBC1

-----

Start 20:15

--:--

VPS PDC*End

Rec Mode

21:30

--:--

To exit

Press TIMER

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Press TIMER on the remote control.

The programming mode selected last is marked.

3 Select 'Timer List' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C .

4 Select the programmed recording (TIMER) you want to check, change

or delete with CH- B or CH+ A .

Delete programmed recording

Press the CLEAR button.

Confirm with OK .'Timer Cleared' will briefly appear on the TV screen. '-- ---' appears rather than the displayed values

To end, press TIMER .

5 Press C .

Select the input field with D or C . If required, change the information with CH+ A , CH- B or the number buttons 0..9 .

6 Confirm with OK .

7 To end, press TIMER .

8 Switch off with STANDBY m .

Tip

'NexTView Link'

This DVD recorder is equipped with the 'NexTView Link' feature. If your television is also equipped with this function, you can mark TV programmes on the television for programming. These TV programmes will automatically be transmitted to a TIMER block on the DVD recorder. If you clear the marking of the TV programme on the television, the corresponding TIMER block on the DVD recorder will also be cleared. For more information, read the instruction manual of your TV set.

Directions For Use

If any of the TIMER blocks are in use, 'TIMER' will light up on the recorder display.

Programming a recording (TIMER)

EN 37DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Programming a recording (TIMER)

Page 38

EN 38 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

Problem solving for programmed recordings

PROBLEM SOLUTION

The DVD recorder is not responding

'Switch off, timer recording' flashes on the TV screen.

Error message: 'Insert recordable disc'

The error message 'Disc locked' appears briefly on the screen.

Error message: 'Memory full'

The 'Data error' message appears on the screen.

The 'Collision' message appears on the screen.

While a programmed recording is being made, you cannot operate your DVD recorder manually. If you want to cancel the programmed recording, press STANDBY m .

The DVD recorder was switched on several minutes before the start of a programmed recording. Switch off the DVD recorder using STANDBY m . A programmed recording (timer) will only function if the DVD recorder is switched off ( STANDBY m button).

Either a disc has not been inserted or the disc cannot be used for recording. Insert a disc on which recordings can be made. Switch off the DVD recorder using STANDBY m .

A write-protected disc has been inserted. Undo the write protection (see 'Preventing accidental erasing of discs' in 'Manual recording') or insert a different disc.

If this error message appears after pressing TIMER , then all TIMER blocks are already programmed. No more recordings can be programmed. Press the C button. If you want to clear or check a programmed recording (TIMER block), select it with CH+ A or CH- B .

The data for the recording could not be transferred. Please check date, start time and end time of the programmed recording.

Two programmed recordings overlap.

If you ignore this error message the show with the earlier start time will be recorded first. The start of the second show will not be recorded.

Change the setting for either of the two recordings.

Clear either of the two recordings

ENGLISH

User preferences

In this section you will learn how to set your user preferences on the DVD recorder. The symbols have the following meanings:

       

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar

appears.

3 Select '

4 Select the appropriate function with CH- B or CH+ A and confirm

5 Select the appropriate line using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm

6 Select the appropriate function using CH- B or CH+ A or the

7 Confirm the new setting by pressing OK .

8 To close the menu item, press D .

' using D or C and confirm with CH- B .

with C .

setting with D or C .

Picture setting

Sound setting

Language setting

Additional settings

Remote control settings

Disc settings

Recording settings

Installation

Directions For Use

Programming a recording (TIMER)

TV shape 16:9

Black level shift Off

Vertical video shift ï

SCART video RGB

Picture settings

You can choose the following features in this menu:

'TV shape'

The picture signal from your DVD Recorder can be set to match your TV screen.

Picture

'4:3 letterbox': for a 'wide-screen' picture with black bars at the top and bottom '4:3 panscan': for a full-height picture with the sides trimmed. '16:9' : for a wide-screen TV set (screen edge ratio 16:9)

'Black level shift'

Adapts the colour dynamics for NTSC playback

User preferences

Page 39

Digital output All

Analogue output Stereo

Night mode Off

'Vertical video shift'

Use this feature to adjust the position of the picture on your TV left or right using D , C to suit your TV set.

'SCART video'

By default the recorder is set to 'RGB'. Select 'S-Video' if you want to connect an S-VHS recorder.

Sound settings

Depending on which audio outputs are used, you can select the settings in this menu. If you only use the analogue audio output ( OUT L AUDIO R ), select the settings 'Off' in the 'Digital output' menu.

'Digital output'

For devices connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT socket, you can select from the following

Sound

settings.

'All': Dolby Digital and DTS signals are fed unaltered to the digital output. MPEG-2 multi-channel

signals are converted to PCM (Pulse Code Modulation). For receivers/amplifiers with digital multichannel sound decoders.

'PCM only: Dolby Digital and MPEG-2 multi-channel signals are converted to PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation). For receivers/amplifiers without digital multichannel sound decoders.

'Off: Digital output switched off.

For devices with analogue audio input.

'Analogue output'

For devices connected to the analogue audio output ( OUT L AUDIO R ), you can select from the following settings.

'Stereo': For devices without DolbySurround or TruSurround. Use this setting if the DVD

recorder is only connected to a stereo TV set.

'Surround: Dolby Digital and MPEG-2 multi-channel are mixed down to a DOLBY

surround-compatible two-channel output signal. For devices with Dolby Surround

Pro Logic decoder .

'Night mode'

Night mode optimises the sound for playback at low volume. You are therefore less likely to disturb your neighbours. This only works for Dolby Digital audio on DVD video discs.

ENGLISH

Audio Language English

Recording audio Language 1

Subtitle English

Menu English

Country Other

Status box On

Standby Off

Display Bright

Language settings

You can choose the following settings in this menu:

'Audio Language'

Playback audio language

Language

'Recording audio'

Audio recording

'Subtitle'

Subtitle language

'Menu'

Screen menu language

'Country'

Additional settings

You can select the following functions in this menu:

'Status box'

Along with the on screen menu, the OSD (On Screen Display) also displays information on the

Features

current operating status (counter, playback, recording, TV channel, etc.) on the TV screen. You can switch off the information about the operating status so that the on screen display (OSD) is not recorded during copying.

'On': The OSD information appears in every selected mode for a few seconds and disappears

again.

'Off': The OSD information is switched off. It is no longer displayed on the screen.

Directions For Use

User preferences

EN 39DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

User preferences

Page 40

EN 40 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

'Standby'

To save power, you can switch off the clock display on the DVD recorder. Programmed (TIMER) recordings will still take place. In addition, you can present the most important features of the DVD recorder in scrolling text in the display (demo).

'Low power': If the DVD-Recorder is switched off (button STANDBY m ), the clock display is

'Off': If the DVD-Recorder is switched off (button STANDBY m ), the clock display is visible.

'Demo mode': If the DVD recorder is switched off with the STANDBY m button, a list of the

also switched off.

most important features is shown in the display.

'Display'

You can change the brightness of the display on the DVD recorder. This setting only affects the DVD recorder when it is switched on.

'Bright': The display appear with normal brightness. The disc tray light is switched on.

'Dimmed': The display appears less bright. The disc tray light is switched off.

'Off': The display and the disc tray light are switched off.

Remote Control settings

In this menu you can set the remote control type to which your DVD recorder should respond.

'DVD player': The DVD recorder responds to a DVD player remote control.

'DVD recorder': The DVD recorder only responds to the supplied remote control.

The DVD recorder also responds to the remote control of a DVD player (remote control code RC-6). Choose this setting if your Philips TV remote supports DVD functions.

ENGLISH

Status box On

Standby Off

Display Bright

Disk feature menu

In this menu you can make the changes that relate to the disc:

'Access control'

Please read the next chapter on 'Access control (child lock)'.

Features

'Auto resume'

If playback of a pre-recorded DVD video disc or video CD is interrupted (button STOP h or

OPEN/CLOSE J ) when the disc is reloaded (disc is started) playback starts at the precise

location where it stopped. This applies not only to the current disc but to the last 20 discs played.

This feature can be switched off if not required.

'PBC'

This line appears only if a VCD is loaded. This function lets you activate or deactivate the PBC menu (Playback Control) for video CDs. See 'Playing a (Super) Video CD'.

'Finalise disc'

This feature allows you to finalise DVD+R discs. If the disc has already been finalised this line will appear darker.

'Adapt disc format'

If a DVD+RW has been recorded in a computer drive or in another DVD recorder the index screen may not be displayed correctly. This feature allows you to change the format of the disc. It is therefore only visible if the disc format is different.

Directions For Use

User preferences

Page 41

Access control (Child Lock)

Child lock (DVD and VCD)

This feature enables discs to be locked for children. When Child Lock is on, a 4-digit code (PIN) needs to be entered before a disc can be played. You can also decide whether the inserted disc should always be played or should be played only once, despite the child lock

•)'Play always': This disc is stored in a memory with space for 50 child-safe discs. If more than 50 discs are stored, the last disc in the list is removed and the new disc is added. The screen shows 'Child safe' at the start of playback.

•)'Play once': This disc is only authorised for single playback. If the recorder is switched off, the PIN code must be re-entered.

Activating/deactivating child lock

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .

3 Press SYSTEM-MENU . The menu bar appears

4 Select the '

5 Select '

with C .

6 Confirm 'Access control' using C .

7 Enter a 4-digit code of your choice. If the code is new, you may have

to enter the code a second time as confirmation.

8 Select 'Child lock' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with C .

9 Select the '

0 Confirm with OK .

A Quit the feature using D and SYSTEM-MENU .

' icon using D or C .

(Disc features)' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm



' icon using CH- B or CH+ A .



ENGLISH

Authorising a disc

1 Insert a disc. The access control box will appear after a short delay.

2 Using CH+ A or CH- B select 'Play once'or'Play always'.

3 Enter your PIN code using the number buttons 0..9 .

Double-sided DVDs may have a different ID for each side. For these discs, each side must be authorised. Multi-volume video CDs may have a different ID for each volume. For these CDs, each volume must be authorised.

Locking unlocked discs

To lock a disc that was formerly authorised follow the instructions below

1 Insert a disc. Playback starts automatically. If the playback does not

start automatically, press PLAY G .

2 Press the STOP h button while the '

changes to '

'. The disc is now locked.



' icon is visible. The icon



Parental level control (DVD video only)

Films on pre-recorded DVD discs may contain scenes not suitable for children. Therefore, some discs may contain 'Parental Control' rating information that applies to the entire disc or to certain scenes on the disc. The appropriate scenes have filter values that reach from 1-8. If such a scene is detected during playback, the filter value set on the DVD recorder is compared to the scene. If the filter value is higher than the setting, an alternative scene will be played (if available). Most DVDs apply the rating to an entire DVD. Therefore, if certain scenes exceed the rating you select, the entire disc will be blocked from viewing.

Directions For Use

Access control (Child Lock)

Unauthorised discs can only be played by entering the four-digit PIN code. To deactivate the child lock, select the '

' icon in9.



EN 41DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Access control (Child Lock)

Page 42

EN 42 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x13.

Access control Enter code…

Auto resume On

Disc features

Activating/deactivating parental level control

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .

3 Press SYSTEM-MENU . The menu bar appears

4 Select the '

5 Select '

with C .

6 Confirm 'Access control' using C .

7 Enter a 4-digit code of your choice. If the code is new, you may have

to enter the code a second time as confirmation.

8 Select the 'Parental level' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm

with C . A bar appears to select the parental level.

9 Select the appropriate rating using CH- B , CH+ A or the number

buttons 0..9 .

0 Confirm with OK . Quit using D and SYSTEM-MENU .

' icon using D or C .

(Disc features)' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm



What do the ratings mean?

Rating 0 (displayed as '--') parental control not active. Rating 1 (suitable for children) Rating 8 (only suitable for adults)

What happens if a DVD scene contains a higher level than the rating set?

If the recorder does not find a suitable alternative, playback will stop and you must enter the four-digit code.

Tip

ENGLISH

Access control Enter code…

Auto resume On

Disc features

Changing the country

The set filter values depend on the respective country. It is therefore necessary to enter the country to which these filter values apply.

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .

3 Press SYSTEM-MENU . The menu bar appears

4 Select the '

5 Select line '

6 Confirm the line 'Access control' using C .

7 Enter your four-digit code. If the code is new, you may have to enter

8 Select 'Change country' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with

9 Select the corresponding country using CH+ A or CH- B and

0 To end, press D and then SYSTEM-MENU .

' icon using D or C .

(Disc features)' using CH- B or CH+ A and



confirm with C .

the code a second time as confirmation.

C .

confirm with OK .

Directions For Use

Access control (Child Lock)

Page 43

Changing the PIN code

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .

3 Press SYSTEM-MENU . The menu bar appears

4 Select the '

5 Select '

with C .

' icon using D or C .

(Disc features)' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm



ENGLISH

Access control Enter code…

Auto resume On

Disc features

6 Confirm 'Access control' using C .

7 Enter your four-digit PIN code. If the code is new, you may have to

enter the code a second time as confirmation.

8 Select 'Change code' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with

C .

9 Enter the new code using the number buttons 0..9 . Enter the same

code again as confirmation.

0 Quit using D and SYSTEM-MENU .

I have forgotten my code

Press STOP h four times (step 7 ), then press OK . Access control is now switched off. You can now enter a new code as described above.

Directions For Use

Tip

EN 43DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 3.

Access control (Child Lock)

Page 44

EN 44 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x14.

4. Mechanical Instructions

Mechanical Instructions

4.1 Dismantling and Assembly of the Set

For item numbers please see the exploded views in chapter 10.

4.1.1 Front

– After removing the top cover, remove tray front 70, see

picture 4-1 – Remove the three screws 205 – Release the two snap hooks on the sides and remove the

front – Remove the 9 screws 200 to remove the front plate 102,

see picture 4-2

4.1.2 EPG Board, only for sets with Guide Plus

– Remove the two screws 218, see picture 4-3 – Release the snaps of the two board spacers 130 – Turn the PCB in the service position

Figure 4-1

Figure 4-2

Figure 4-3

Page 45

Mechanical Instructions

EN 45DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 4.

4.1.3 DVIO Board, only for sets with DV input

To put the DVIO board in a service position, an extender board must be used. This extender board can be ordered with codenumber 3104 128 07770. – After removal of the EPG board (if present) the DVIO board

can be reached – Remove the two screws 216, see picture 4-4 – Release the snaps of the two board spacers 125 – Put the DVIO board in the service position with the

extender board 3104 128 07770.

4.1.4 Digital Board

– After removal of EPG board (if present) and DVIO board

the digital board can be reached – Remove screws 214 – Turn the PCB in the service position

Figure 4-4

Figure 4-5

Page 46

EN 46 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x14.

Mechanical Instructions

4.1.5 Basic Engine

– Remove the tray 70 – Remove the four screws 255 – Turn the engine in the service position

4.1.6 Analog Board

– Remove the 7 screws 250 and 210 – Remove screw safety holder 145 – Unlock the two snaps hooks on the left and right – Turn the PCB in the service position

Figure 4-6

Figure 4-8

Figure 4-7

Page 47

DISMANTLING INSTRUCTIONS

See exploded view for item numbers

Cover 300

⇒

Remove 9 screws 298

⇒

Lift the cover to remove

4.2 Dismantling Instructions

mounting

demounting

Figure 4-9

Front assy

⇒

Display board 1004

⇒

TR 06003_001

300103

open the tray and remove

tray front 70

remove 3 screws 205 (front assy

unlock the front from the frame by releasing 2 snaps on left and right

remove 9 screws 200 to remove the plate front 102

→

frame 100)

Remove screws

→

(board

Remove screws 209 of DV input cable

demount the board

front)

the

200

IOE board 1005

⇒

Remove 2 screws 234, 235

frame 100)

(IOE board

⇒

demount the board

Analog board 1001

⇒

Remove the connections

⇒ remove 11 screws 230, 231

(board backplate)

⇒ remove 3 screws 250

(frame backplate)

⇒ remove 4 screws 210

(board frame)

⇒

remove screw safety holder 145

⇒

demount the board

→

EPG board 1006

⇒

Remove 2 screws 218

(Digital board bracket 161)

⇒

Release the snaps of 2 spacers 130 (DVIO board EPG board)

⇒

demount the board.

DVIO board 1003

⇒

Remove 2 screws 216 (DVIO board bracket 161)

⇒

Release the snaps of 2 spacers 125 (DVIO board Digital board)

⇒

demount the board carefully. (board to board connection to the Digital board)

Digital board 1002

⇒

Remove the connections

⇒

Remove 4 screws 214

(Digital board frame 100) demount the board.

⇒

→

DVDR BASIC ENGINE 1007

⇒ Remove the connections

⇒

Open the tray and remove the tray front 70

⇒

Remove 4 screws 255 (Basic Engine 1007

⇒

Demount the DVDR Basic Engine

Manual opening of tray and removal of tray front 70

In case the loader is defective and cannot be opened electrically, you can open the tray as follows:

It is possible to unlock the tray by means

⇒

of a screwdriver via a slot in the front and frame at the underside. .

Push the white pin of the slider at the underside of the basic engine to the right (seen from the front)

⇒

Open the unlocked tray.

→

support bracket 160)

Mechanical Instructions

EN 47DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 4.

Page 48

EN 48 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

5. Diagnostic Software

Diagnostic Software

Due to the complexity of the DVD recorder, the time to find a defect in the recorder can become long. To reduce this time, the recorder has been equipped with Diagnostic and Service software (DS). The DS offers functionality to diagnose the DVDR hardware and tests the following:

• Interconnections between components

• Accessibility of components

• Functionality of the audio and video paths This functionality can be accessed via several interfaces:

1. End user/Dealer script interface

2. Player script interface

3. Menu and command interface

5.1 End User/Dealer Script Interface

5.1.1 Description

The End user/Dealer script interface gives a diagnosis on a stand alone DVD recorder. You only need a cinch audio and video cable for the test. During this mode, a number of hardware tests (nuclei) are automatically executed to check if the recorder is faulty. The diagnosis is simply a "fail" or "pass" message. If the message "FAIL" appears on the display, there is apparently a failure in the recorder. If the message "PASS" appears, the nuclei in this mode have been executed successfully. There can be still a failure in the recorder because the nuclei in this mode don't cover the complete functionality of the recorder.

5.1.2 Contents

Unplug the power cord Hold key <PLAY> pressed

while you plug the recorder

During the test, the following display is shown: the counter counts down from the number of nuclei to be run before the test finishes. Example:

SET O.K.?

YES

To exit DEALER SCRIPT, unplug the power cord

Figure 5-1

The End use/Dealer script executes all diagnostic nuclei that do not need any user interaction and are meaningful on a standalone DVD recorder. The nuclei called in the End user/ Dealer script are the following:

CL 16532095_068.eps

150801

Counter Nucleus Name Description 22 104 HostdSdramW rR checks all memory locations of the 4MB SDRAM 21 106 HostdDramWrR checks all the DRAM connected to the microprocessor of the digital board 20 123 HostdI2cNvram checks the data line (SDA) and the clock line (SCL) of the I2C bus between the host decoder

and NVRAM

19 202 SAA7118I2c checks the interface between the Host I2C controller and the AVENC SAA7118 Video Input

Processor 18 200 VideoEncI2c checks the interface between the host I2C controller and Empress SAA6752 17 207 AudioEncI2c checks the I2C connection between the host decoder and Empress SAA6752 16 204 AudioEncAccess tests the HIO8 interface lines between the host decoder and the audio encoder 15 203 AudioEncSramAc cess checks the access of the SRAM by the audio encoder (address and data lines). 14 205 AudioEncSramWrR tests the SRAM connected to the audio encoder 13 206 AudioEncInterrupt tests the interrupt line between the host decoder and the audio encoder 12 300 VsmAccess checks whether the VSM interrupt controllers and DRAM are accessible 11 303 VsmInterrupt checks both interrupt lines between the VSM and the host decoder 10 302 VsmSdramWrR tests the entire SDRAM of the VSM 9 1400 Clock11_289MHz switches the A_CLK of the micro clock to 11.2896 MHz 8 1401 Clock12_288MHz switches the A_CLK of the micro clock to 12.288 MHz 7 601 BeS2B engine checks the S2B interface with the Basic Engine by sending an echo command 6 500 D isplayEc ho checks the interface between the host processor and the slave processor on the display

board 5 700 AnalogueEc ho checks the interface between the host processor and the microprocessor on the analogue

board 4 711 AnalogueNvr am checks the NVRAM on the analogue board 3 706 AnalogueTuner checks whether the tuner on the analogue board is accessible

Page 49

Diagnostic Software

Counter Nucleus Name Description 2 901 LoopAudioUserDealer This nucleus tests the components on the audio signal path The host decoder

- The analogue board

- The audio encoder

- The VSM Attention: the rear cinch audio out has to be connected to the front cinch audio in.

1 906 LoopVideoUserDealer Nucleus for testing the components on the video signal system path:

- The VIP

- The video encoder

- The VSM

- The host decoder

- The analogue board Attention: the rear cinch video out has to be connected to the front cinch video in.

EN 49DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

5.2 Player Script Interface

5.2.1 Description

The Player script will give the opportunity to perform a test that will determine which of the DVD recorder's modules are faulty, to read the error log and to perform an endurance loop test. To successfully perform the tests, the DVD recorder must be connected to a TV set. To be able to check results of certain nuclei, the player script expects some interaction of the user (i.e. to approve a test picture or a test sound). Some nuclei (e.g. nuclei that test functionality of the DVDR module) require that a DVD+RW disc is inserted. Only tests within the scope of the diagnostic software will be executed hence only faults within this scope can be detected.

STEP DESCRIPTION NUCLEUS 1 Press OPEN/CLOSE and PLAY at the same time and POWER ON the recorder to start the playerscript 2 2 The local display shows FPSEGMENTS. Press PLAY to start the te st.

First the starburst pattern is lit, then the horizontal segments are lit, followed by the vertical segments and the last test is light all segments test. After each of the 4 tests the user has to confirm that the correct pattern was lit. Press PLAY to confirm that the correct pattern was lit (four times if the FPSEGMENTS test was successful). Press RECORD to indicate that the correct pattern was not successfully lit. Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

3 The local display shows FPLABELS. Press PLAY to start the te st.

Press PLAY to confirm that all labels are lit. Press RECORD to indicate that not all labels are lit. Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

4 The local display shows FPLIGHT ALL. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press PLAY to confirm that everything was lit. Press RECORD to indicate that not all patterns are lit. Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

5 The local display shows FPLED. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press PLAY to confirm that the led is lit. Press RECORD to indicate that the led is not lit. Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

6 The local display shows FPKEYBOARD. Press PLAY to start the test.

Attention all keys have to be pressed to get a positive result! Press PLAY for more than one second to confirm that all the keys were pressed and shown on the local display. If not all the keys were pressed, a FAIL message will appear on the local display. Press RECORD for more than one second to indicate that not all keys were pressed and shown on the local display. Press STOP for more than one second to skip this nucleus.

7 The local display shows FPREMOTE CONTROL. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press PLAY to confirm that a key on the remote control was pressed and shown on the local display. Only one key has to be pressed to get a successful result. Press RECORD to indicate that the key on the remote control was pressed but not shown on the local display. Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

8 The local display shows FPDIMMER. Press PLAY to start the te s t.

Press PLAY to confirm that the text on the local display was dimmed. Press RECORD to indicate that the text on the local display was not dimmed. Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

9 The local display shows ROUTE VIDEO. Pre ss PLAY to start the test.

Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

5.2.2 Structure of the Player Script

The player script consists of a set of nuclei testing the hardware modules in the DVD recorder: the Display PWB, the Digital PWB, the Analogue In/Out PWB and the DVDR module. Nuclei run by the player test need some user interaction; in the next table this interaction is described. The player test is done in two phases:

• Interactive tests: this part of the player test depends strongly on user interaction and input to determine nucleus results and to progress through the full test. Reading the error log information can be useful to determine any errors that occurred recently during normal operation of the DVD player.

• The loop test will perform the same nuclei as the dealer test, but it will loop through the list of nuclei indefinitely.

502

503

520

504

505

506

518

712

Page 50

EN 50 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

STEP DESCRIPTION NUCLEUS 10 The local display shows ROUTE AUDIO. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

11 The local display shows COLOUR-BAR ON. Press PLAY to st a rt the test.

Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

12 The local display shows PINK NOISE ON. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

13 The local display shows PINK NOISE OFF. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

14 The local display shows SINE ON. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press STOP to stop the sine. Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

15 The local display shows COLOUR-BAR OFF. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

16 The local display shows BERESET. Press PLAY to start th e te st.

Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

17 The local display shows BETRAY OPEN. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

18 The local display shows BETRAY CLOSE. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

19 The local display shows BEWRITE READ. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

20 The local display shows BETRAY OPEN. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

21 The local display shows BETRAY CLOSE. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press STOP to skip this nucleus.

22 The local display shows READ ERRORLOG. Press PLAY to start the test.

Press STOP to skip this nucleus. If the player test succeeded, the user/dealer script will start in an endless loop. If the player test failed, the local display will display FAIL and the error code

Diagnostic Software

713

120

115

116

117

121

603

616

615

617

616

615

633

Remark

In case of failure, the display shows " FAIL XXXXXX ". The description of the shown error code can be retrieved in the survey of Nuclei Error Codes (paragraph 5.4). Once an error occurs, it is not possible to continue the player script. Unplug the set and restart the player script. By pressing the STOP key, it is possible to jump over the failure and to continue the player script.

Page 51

Unplug the power cord Hold 2 keys

simultaneously pressed while you plug the recorder

+ <PLAY>

FRONT PANEL TEST

Figure 5-2

PRESS <PLAY> TO START TEST

PRESS <PLAY> IF OK PRESS <RECORD> IF NOT OK

TR 01006_003

270103

PRESS <STOP> TO SKIP TEST

PRESS <PLAY> IF OK PRESS <STOP> TO ABORT

PRESS <PLAY> TO START TEST

PRESS <PLAY> IF OK PRESS <RECORD> IF NOT OK

PRESS <STOP> TO SKIP TEST

PRESS <PLAY> IF OK PRESS <RECORD> IF NOT OK

PRESS <STOP> TO SKIP TEST

PRESS <PLAY> IF OK PRESS <RECORD> IF NOT OK

PRESS <STOP> TO SKIP TEST

LED BECOMES RED

PRESS <PLAY> TO START TEST

HEXADECIMAL

KEY CODE

PRESS <PLAY> MORE THAN 1S IF TEST IS OK PRESS <RECORD> MORE THAN 1S IF TEST IS NOT OK

FRONT KEY NAME

STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE STOP PLAY RECORD

SEARCH << SEARCH >> CHANNEL UP CHANNEL DOWN REC MODE

PRESS <STOP> TO SKIP TEST

XX TIMES PRESSED

PRESS ALL KEYS AT LEAST ONCE SEE TABLE FOR KEY CODES

FRONT KEY CODE

00E 001 002 003 004 006 005 009 00A 00D

PRESS <PLAY> TO START TEST

HEXADECIMAL

RC KEY CODE

TO EXIT TEST: PRESS ONE OF FOLLOWING KEYS ON THE LOCAL KEYBOARD PRESS <PLAY> IF TEST IS OK PRESS <RECORD> IF TEST IS NOT OK

RC KEY NAME

TV/DVD STANDBY STOP REC/OTR PLAY

PREVIOUS GUIDE NEXT DISC SYSTEM UP LEFT RIGHT DOWN RETURN OK

CLEAR

TIMER SELECT

VOL +

VOL -

REC MODE

DIM

T/C

MONITOR

PRESS <STOP> TO SKIP TEST

XX TIMES PRESSED

PRESS AT LEAST ONE KEY ON THE REMOTE CONTROL SEE TABLE FOR RC KEY CODES

RC KEY CODE

43 0C

31 37

20 54 0F

58 5A 5B

83 5C 41 FE FA

ONLY FOR TV

ONLY FOR TV 94 13

00 C8

RC KEY NAME

PLAY MODE REC MODE DISC MANAGER FSS i

SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM SLOW PAUSE

PRESS <PLAY> TO START TEST

DIGITAL BOARD TEST

RC KEY CODE

94 C7 CF CB 4B 4E

PRESS <STOP> TO SKIP TEST

PRESS <PLAY> IF OK PRESS <RECORD> IF NOT OK

Diagnostic Software

EN 51DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

Page 52

EN 52 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

Diagnostic Software

FRONTPANEL

TEST

DIGITAL BOARD &

ANALOG BOARD

TEST

press <PLAY> to execute press < STOP > to skip

press <PLAY> to execute press <NEXT > to skip

press <PLAY> to execute press < STOP > to skip

BASIC ENGINE

TEST

press <PLAY> to execute press <NEXT > to skip

press <PLAY> to execute

INSERT DVD +RW DISC TO EXECUTE WRITE / READ TEST

press <STOP> to skip

press <PLAY> to execute press <STOP> to skip

press <PLAY> to execute press <STOP > to skip

press <PLAY> to execute press <STOP> to skip

press <STOP> to continue

press <PLAY> to execute

press <PLAY> to execute press <STOP> to skip

press <STOP> to skip

NO ERRORS LOGGED

IF ERROR

To exit PLAYER SCRIPT, unplug the power cord

<PLAY>

PRESS <STOP> TO STEP DOWN

PRESS <RECORD> TO STEP UP

PRESS <PLAY> TO CONTINU

TR 01007_003 270103

Figure 5-3

Page 53

Diagnostic Software

EN 53DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

5.2.3 Error Log

Explanation:

The application errors will be logged in the NVRAM. The maximum number of error bytes that will be visible is 19. The last reported error is shown as DN D0000000, the oldest visible error as D0000000 UP and the errors in between as DN D0000000 UP. DN stands for DOWN, UP stands for UPWARDS. The shown error codes are identical to the Nuclei Error Codes (paragraph 5.4).

5.2.4 Trade Mode

TRADE MODE

When the recorder is in Trade Mode, the recorder cannot be controlled by means of the front key buttons, but only by means of the remote control.

IF TRADE MODE OFF

UNPLUG THE RECORDER

PRESS 2 KEYS

SIMULTANEOUSLY

PLUG THE RECORDER

RECORDER IS IN TRADE MODE

WHEN PRESSING FRONT

KEYS, THE RECORDER

DOESN'T RESPOND

IF TRADE MODE ON

UNPLUG THE RECORDER

PRESS 2 KEYS

SIMULTANEOUSLY

PLUG THE RECORDER

RECORDER IS IN NORMAL MODE

WHEN PRESSING FRONT

KEYS, THE RECORDER

WILL RESPOND

CL 16532095_071.eps

150801

Group number Group name 7 Analogue board (DVDR only) 8 DVIO (DVDR only) 9 Loop nuclei (DVDR only) 10 Library sub nuclei (I2C nuclei) 11 User interface 12 Furore (SACD only) 13 DAC (SACD only) 14 Miscellaneous

5.3.2 Error Handling

Each nucleus returns an error code. This code contains six numerals, which means:

[ XX YY ZZ ]

Error code Nucleus number

Nucleus group number

Figure 5-6

The nucleus group numbers and nucleus numbers are the same as above.

5.3.3 Command Mode Interface

CL 06532152_013.eps

051200

Figure 5-4

5.2.5 Virgin mode

If you want that the recorder starts up in Virgin mode, follow this procedure:

• Unplug the recorder

• plug the recorder again while you keep the STAND BY/ON key pressed

• the set starts up in Virgin mode.

5.3 Menu and Command Mode Interface

5.3.1 Nuclei Numeration

Each nucleus has a unique number of four digits. This number is the input of the command mode.

[ XX YY ]

Nucleus number Nucleus group number

Figure 5-5

CL 06532152_012.eps

051200

Set-Up Physical Interface Components

Hardware required:

• Service PC

• one free COM port on the Service PC

• special cable to connect DVD recorder to Service PC The service PC must have a terminal emulation program (e.g. OS2 WarpTerminal or Procomm) installed and must have a free COM port (e.g. COM1). Activate the terminal emulation program and check that the port settings for the free COM port are: 19200 bps, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit and no flow control. The free COM port must be connected via a special cable to the RS232 port of the DVD recorder. This special cable will also connect the test pin, which is available on the connector, to ground (i.e. activate test pin).

Code number of PC interface cable: 3122 785 90017

Activation

Plug the recorder to the mains and the following text will appear on the screen of the terminal (program):

                       

       !" #$ % & %'

CL 16532095_073.eps

150801

Figure 5-7

The following groups are defined:

Group number Group name 0 Basic / Scripts 1 Host decoder (Sti5505 and memory) 2 Audio / video encoder (DVDR only) 3 VSM (DVDR only) 4NVRAM 5 Front Panel 6 Basic Engine

The first line indicates that the Diagnostic software has been activated and contains the version number. The next lines are the successful result of the SDRAM interconnection test and the basic SDRAM test. The last line allows the user to choose between the three possible interface forms. If pressing C has made a choice for Command Interface, the prompt ("DD>") will appear. The diagnostic software is now ready to receive commands. The commands that can be given are the numbers of the nuclei.

Page 54

EN 54 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

Diagnostic Software

Command Overview

We provide an overview of the nuclei and their numbers. This overview is preliminary and subject to modifications.

Host Decoder [01]

[xx yy] Number

100 Checksum Flash 101 Flash Write Access 1 102 Flash Write Access 2 103 Flash Write Read 104 SdRam Write Read 105 SdRam Write Read Fast 106 Dram Write Read 107 Dram Write Read Fast 108 Hardware Version 109 Mute On 110 Mute Off 115 Pink Noise On 116 Pink Noise Off 117 Sine On 118 Sine Burst 1kHz 119 Sine Burst 12kHz 120 Colour-bar On

121 Colour-bar Off 122 NvramWrR 123 NvramI2c 130 Boot Version 131 Application Version 132 Diagnostics Version 133 Download Version 134 Write / read I2C message to / from digital board 135 Video Test Signal

136 Video Test Signal Off 137 Macrovision Off

Audio Video Decoder [02]

[xx yy] Number

200 Video Encoder I2C 202 SAA7118 I2C 203 Audio Encoder SRAM Access 204 Audio Encoder Access 205 Audio Encoder SRAM Write Read 206 Audio Encoder Interrupts

Nuclei

Note: Use nuclus 712 with parameter 07 to route the signals to the analogue board output

OnNote: Use nuclus 712 with parameter 07 to route the signals to the analogue board output. Input: 135 [a] [b] a: Number of test image,

0. Horizontal colour-bar

1. White

2. Yellow

3. Light blue

4. Green

5. Magenta

6. Red

7. Blue

8. Black

9. Colour triangle (execution time is 12 seconds)

10. Test image for progressive scan (execution time is 6 seconds)

b: Video standard,

0. PAL BDGHI

1. NTSC

Nuclei

[xx yy] Number

207 Audio Encoder I2C 208 SAA7118 select input 209 Empress Version

VSM [03]

[xx yy] Number

300 Register Access 301 SDRAM Access 302 SDRAM Write Read 303 Interrupt lines 304 VSM Interconnection 305 UART

NVRAM [04]

[xx yy] Number

400 Reset 401 Read 402 Modify 403 UniqueNr Read 404 Read Error Log 407 Reset Error Log 409 Line2 Region-Code Reset 410 UniqueNr Store

Front Panel [05]

[xx yy] Number

500 Echo 501 Version 502 Segment 503 Label 504 Led 505 Keyboard 506 Remote-Control 507 Segment Starburst 508 Segment Vertical 509 Segment Horizontal 514 Beeper 515 Discbar 516 Discbar Dots 517 Vu / Grid 518 Dimmer 519 Blinking 520 Light All Segments 522 Flap Open 523 Flap Close

Basic Engine [06]

[xx yy] Number

600 S2B Pass 601 S2B Echo 602 Version 603 Reset 604 Focus On 605 Focus Off 606 Disc Motor On 607 Disc Motor Off 608 Radial On

Nuclei

Page 55

Diagnostic Software

EN 55DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

[xx yy] Number

609 Radial Off 615 Tray In 616 Tray Out 617 Write Read 618 Write Read Endless Loop 619 Selftest 620 BE Test 621 Laser Test 622 Spindle (Disc) Motor Test 623 Focus Test 624 Sledge Motor Test 625 Sledge Motor Slow 626 Tilt 627 EEPROM Read 628 EEPROM Write 629 Optimise Jitter 630 Radial ATLS Calibration 631 Get Statistics Information 632 Reset Statistics Information 633 BE Read Error Log 634 BE Reset Error Log 638 Get Self Test Result 639 Radial Initialisation 640 Get OPU info

Analog Board [07]

[xx yy] Number

700 Echo 703 Boot Version 704 Hardware Version 705 Clock Adjust 706 Tuner 707 Frequency Download 708 Data Slicer 709 Sound Processor 710 AV Selector 711 Nvram 712 Route Video 713 Route Audio 715 Set Slash Version 716 Application Version 717 Diagnostics Version 718 Download Version 720 Bargraph Level Adjustment 721 Clock correction 722 Clock reference 723 Re-virginise Recorder 724 Flash Checksum 725 Tuner frequency selection

727 Set virgin bit 728 Clear Virgin Bit 729 Write / read I2C message to / from analogue board

Nuclei

Europe: To make video and audio signals from the tuner available on Scart2, send command "712 08". For Nafta/Apac: To make the black/white Video available on Y/C Rear Out connector, send command “712 08” Input: 725 [frequency in MHz*16] [system] System: NTSC=16, PAL BG=16, PAL I=32, PAL DK=48, SEC L=64, SEC LS=80, SEC BG=96, SEC DK=112

[xx yy] Number

730 Store external presets 731 Get slash version 732 AFC Reference Voltage Tuner 736 Get EPG Version 737 Get operating hours in Tuner Mode

DVIO [08]

[xx yy] Number

800 Check DVIO board presence 801 Reset DVIO 802 DVIO Access 803 Get DVIO error codes 804 Get DVIO module Ids 805 Execute DVIO module SelfTestInput: 805 [a]

806 Set DVIO led on. 807 Set DVIO led off.

Loop Nuclei [09]

[xx yy] Number

900 Digital Audio Loop(no function in Gen. 1.5 and Lead) 901 User / Dealer Audio Loop 902 Digital Video Loop 903 Digital Video VBI Loop 904 System Video Loop 905 System Video VBI Loop 906 User / Dealer Video Loop 907 User / Dealer Video VBI Loop 908 System Audio Loop SCART 909 System Audio Loop CINCH 910 Digital DVIO Video Loop 911 System Video Vip

Miscellanious [14]

[xx yy] Number

1400 Clock 11.289 MHz 1401 Clock 12.288 MHz 1412 Progressive Scan I2C 1413 Progressive Scan test image on 1414 Progressive Scan test image off 1415 Progressive Scan Route Enable 1416 Progressive Scan Route Disable

Scripts [00]

[xx yy] Number

1 UserDealer Script 2 Player Script

Routing Audio and Video

Route Video

Nucleus Number: 712 Description This nucleus routes the video signals on the analogue board to the destination determined by the input parameters

Nuclei

[b]Parameters: a=1/0…full Ram test, b=1/0…cable connected

Nuclei

Page 56

EN 56 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

Diagnostic Software

The paths that are available for video routing and their description (Nafta region): Example DD:> 712 01 71200: Video routing on the Analogue Board OK. Test OK @

PATH ID DESCRIPTION

00 No Routing. 01 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN

and will be routed to the digital board.

02 Input signal is from REAR AUDIO IN 2

and will be routed to the digital board.

03 Input Audio Signal is routed from FRONT

Cinch In to Digital Board.(This is same as path id 01)

04 Input Signal is from Rear Cinch In1 and it

will be routed to Digital Board.. 05 No routing. 06 No routing. 07 No routing. 08 No Routing. 09 No routing. 10 No Routing. 11 No Routing. 12 No Routing. 13 Input Signal is from Digital Board and it

will be routed to the digital board. 14 No routing. 15 Input is Audio Signal from TUNER and it

will be routed to Digital Board. 16 Input signal is AUDIO from dvio board

and will be routed to Digital Board. 17 No routing. 18 No routing. 19 No routing. 20 Input signal is from REAR AUDIO IN 2

and will be routed to the digital board. 21 Input signal is from REAR AUDIO IN 1

and will be routed to the digital board. 22 Input signal is from REAR AUDIO IN 1

and will be routed to the digital board. 23 The Audio signal received from the Digital

board will be outputted on Modulator

channel 3. Please use command 117 for

testing audio because Nuclei 117 will

generate the Audio signal on the digital

Board. 24 The Audio signal received from the Digital

board will be outputted on Modulator

channel 4. Please use command 117 for

testing audio because Nuclei 117 will

generate the Audio signal on the digital

Board.

Route Audio

Nucleus Number: 713 Description This nucleus routes the audio on the analogue board to the destination determined by the input parameters The paths that are available for audio routing and their description (Europe version) EXAMPLE DD:> 713 00 71300: Audio routing on the Analogue Board OK. Test OK @

PATH ID DESCRIPTION 00 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will

be routed to the digital board.(This is done so that nucleus 901 works)

01 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will

be routed to the digital board. 02 No Routing. 03 Input signal is AUDIO from SCART1 and will be

routed to the digital board. 04 Input signal is AUDIO from SCART2 and will be

routed to the digital board. 05 No routing. 06 No routing. 07 Input Audio signal is from the digital Board and

it will be routed to the Scart 1 and Scart2 08 Input AUDIO signal from TUNER and will be

routed to SCART2. 09 Input signal is AUDIO from SCART1 and will be

routed to SCART2. 10 Input audio signal from Scart2 is routed to

Scart1. 11 Input Audio signal is routed from DVIO to

Scart2. 12 13 No Routing. 14 Input is Audio Signal from DVIO and it will be

routed to Digital Board. 15 Input is Audio Signal from TUNER and it will be

routed to Digital Board.. 16 No routing. 17 No Routing. 18 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will

be routed to SCART2. 21 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will

be routed to the digital board.(This is done so

that nucleus 909.1 works)

5.3.4 Menu Mode Interface

Activation

Plug the recorder to the mains and the following text will appear on the screen of the terminal (program):

                       

       !" #$ % &

 

'(" ) """ *"" (" ) """ * +(" , -)""" * ("  .""" * /(" 01""""" * 2(" -  " * 3(" 4 """ * (" 4""""" * 5(" """" *

)*

Figure 5-8

The first line indicates that the Diagnostic software has been activated and contains the version number. The next lines are the successful result of the SDRAM interconnection test and the basic SDRAM test. The last line allows the user to choose between the three possible interface forms. If pressing M has made a choice for Menu Interface, the Main Menu will appear.

Page 57

Diagnostic Software

EN 57DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

Menu Structure

The following menu structure is given after starting up the DVD recorder in menu mode. The symbol -> indicates that the current menu choice will invoke the display of a submenu.

Main Menu

1.Digital Board ->

2.Analogue Board ->

3.Front Panel ->

4.Basic Engine ->

5.DVIO ->

6.Progressive Scan Board ->

7.Loop Tests ->

8.Log ->

9.Scripts ->

Digital Board Menu

1.Host Decoder - >

2.VSM ->

3.AVENC ->

4.NVRAM ->

Host Decoder Menu

1.Flash Checksum

2.Flash1 Write Access

3.Flash2 Write Access

4.Flash Write/Read

5.Host SDRAM Write/Read

6.Host SDRAM Fast Write/Read

7.Host DRAM Write/Read

8.Host DRAM Fast Write/Read

9.I2C NVRAM

10.NVRAM Write/Read

11.Engine S2B Echo

12.Versions ->

13.Audio Mute ->

14.Colourbar ->

15.Pink Noise ->

16.Sine Generate ->

AVENC Menu

1.Empress ->

2.Video Input Processors ->

Empress Menu

1.Version number

Video Input Processors Menu

1.SAA7118 I2C Access

NVRAM Menu

1.Read Error Log

2.Reset Error Log

3.Read DVIO Unique ID

Analogue Board Menu

1.Echo

2.Obsolete

3.Route Video Input back to Digital board

4.Route Audio Input back to Digital board

5.Flash Checksum

6.Versions ->

7.Components ->

8.Re-virginize Recorder ->

Analogue Board Versions Menu

1.Hardware Version

2.Bootcode version

3.Application version

4.Diagnostics version

5.Download version

Analogue Components Menu

1.Tuner

2.Data Slicer

3.Sound Processor

4.AV Selector

5.NVRAM

Digital Board Versions Menu

1.Hardware Version

2.Bootcode version

3.Applications Version

4.Diagnostics Version

5.Download Version

Audio Mute Menu

1.Audio Mute On

2.Audio Mute Off

Colourbar Menu

1.Colourbar On

2.Colourbar Off

Pink Noise Menu

1.Pink Noise On

2.Pink Noise Off

Sine Generate Menu

1.Sine On

2.Sine Burst 1kHz

3.Sine Burst 12kHz

VSM Menu

1.Register Access

2.SDRAM Access

3.VSM SDRAM Write/Read

4.Interrupt Lines

5.VSM Interconnection

6.UART

Analogue Board Re-virginize Menu

1.Re-virginize Recorder

2.Set Virgin-bit

3.Clear Virgin-bit

4.Store external presets

Front Panel Menu

1.Echo

2.Version

3.Flap Control ->

4.Segment Test ->

5.Light Labels

6.Led test

7.Keyboard test

8.Remote Control

9.Beep

10.Disc Bar

11.Disc Bar Dots

12.Vu Grid

13.Dimmer

14.Blink

15.Light All Segments

Flap Control Menu

1.Open Flap

2.Close Flap

Segment Test Menu

1.Starburst

2.Light Horizontal Segments

3.Light Vertical Segments

4.Light All Segments

Page 58

EN 58 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

Diagnostic Software

Basic Engine Menu

1.Reset

2.S2B Pass-through

3.S2B Echo

4.Focus On

5.Focus Off

6.Version

7.Self Test

8.Get Self Test Result

9.Basic Engine Test

10.Laser Test

11.Focus Tes t

12.Tilt Test

13.Optimise Jitte r

14.Statistics Info

15.Log ->

16.Spindle Motor ->

17.Radial ->

18.Sledge ->

19.Tray ->

Basic Engine Error Log

1.Read Error Log

2.Reset Error Log

Basic Engine Spindle Motor Menu

1.Spindle Motor On

2.Spindle Motor Off

3.Spindle Motor Test

Basic Engine Radial Menu

1.Radial On

2.Radial Off

3.Radial Initialisation

4.Radial ATLS Calibration

Basic Engine Sledge Menu

1.Sledge test

2.Sledge test slow

Basic Engine Tray Menu

1.Tray In

2.Tray Out

DVIO Menu

1.Check Presence

2.Reset

3.Access

4.Error Codes

5.Module Identifiers

6.Led ->

DVIO Led Menu

1.Led On

2.Led Off

Progressive Scan Board Menu

1.I2C Access

2.Test Image On

3.Test Image Off

Loop Tests Menu

1.Digital Board Loops ->

2.User/Dealer Loops ->

3.System Loops ->

4.Basic Engine Loops ->

Digital Board Loops Menu

1.Obsolete

2.Digital Video Loop

3.Digital Video Loop VBI

User/Dealer Loops Menu

1.User/Dealer Audio Loop

2.User/Dealer Video Loop

3.User/Dealer Video Loop VBI

System Loops Menu

1.System Video Loop

2.System Video Loop VBI

3.System Audio Loop SCART(EURO)

4.System Audio Loop CINCH (NAFTA)

Basic Engine Loops Menu

1.Basic Engine write read

2.Basic Engine write read endless loop

Log Menu

1.Read Error Log

2.Reset Error Log

Script Menu

1.User/Dealer Script

2.Player Script

5.4 Nuclei Error Codes

In the following table the error codes will be described.

Error Nr Error String 10000 "Checksum is OK" 10001 "segment name Checksum doesn't match" or "seg-

ment name segment not found" 10100 "" 10101 "FLASH 1 Write access test failed" 10200 "" 10201 "FLASH 2 Write access test failed" 10300 "" 10301 "FLASH write test failed" 10302 "FLASH write command failed" 10303 "FLASH write test done max. number of times" 10400 "" 10401 "HostDec SDRAM Memory data bus test goes

wrong." 10402 " HostDec SDRAM Memory address bus test goes

wrong." 10403 " HostDec SDRAM Physical memory device test

goes wrong." 10500 "" 10501 " HostDec SDRAM Memory data bus test goes

wrong." 10502 " HostDec SDRAM Memory address bus test goes

wrong." 10503 " HostDec SDRAM Physical memory device test

goes wrong." 10600 "" 10601 "HostDec DRAM Memory data bus test goes

wrong." 10602 "HostDec DRAM Memory address bus test goes

wrong." 10603 "HostDec DRAM Physical memory device test

goes wrong." 10700 "" 10701 "HostDec DRAM Memory data bus test goes

wrong." 10702 "HostDec DRAM Memory address bus test goes

wrong." 10703 "HostDec DRAM Physical memory device test

goes wrong."

Page 59

Diagnostic Software

EN 59DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

Error Nr Error String 10800 "Host Decoder version(cut) number: version

number""Digital hardware version" 10801 "Can not find version in FLASH." 10900 "" 10901 "Error muting audio" 11000 "" 11001 "Error demuting audio" 11500 "" 11501 "Init of I2C failed" 11502 "The selection of the clock source failed" 11504 "The demute of the audio failed" 11600 "" 11601 "Init of I2C failed" 11602 "The mute of the audio failed" 11700 "" 11701 "Init of I2C failed" 11702 "The muting of the audio failed" 11703 "The demute of the audio failed" 11704 "The selection of the clock source failed" 11707 "Setup of Front panel failed" 11708 "Sine on Front panel keyboard failed" 11800 "" 11801 "Init of I2C failed" 11802 "The muting of the audio failed" 11803 "The demute of the audio failed" 11804 "The selection of the clock source failed" 11805 "Error cannot start VSM audio in port" 11900 "" 11901 "Init of I2C failed" 11902 "The muting of the audio failed" 11903 "The demute of the audio failed" 11904 "The selection of the clock source failed" 11905 "Error cannot start VSM audio in port" 12000 "" 12001 "Invalid input 12100 "" 12200 "" 12201 "I2C bus busy before start" 12202 "NVRAM access time-out" 12203 "No NVRAM acknowledge" 12204 "NVRAM time-out" 12205 "NVRAM Write/Read back failed" 12300 "" 12301 "I2C bus busy before start" 12302 "NVRAM read access time-out" 12303 "No NVRAM read acknowledge" 12304 "NVRAM read failed" 13000 "Bootcode application version : bootversion" 13001 "Can not find version in FLASH." 13100 "Recorder application version : recorderversion" 13101 "Can not find version in FLASH." 13200 "Diagnostics application version : diagversion" 13201 "Can not find version in FLASH." 13300 "Download application version : downloadversion" 13301 "Can not find version in FLASH." 13700 "" 13701 "Turning off MacroVision failed" 20000 "" 20001 "I2C bus busy before start" 20002 "Video Encoder access time-out" 20003 "No acknowledge from Video Encoder"

Error Nr Error String 20004 "No data send/received to or from Video Encoder" 20005 "SAA7118 VIP can not be initialised" 20200 "" 20201 "I2C bus busy before start" 20202 "SAA7118 VIP access time-out" 20203 "No acknowledge from SAA7118 VIP" 20204 "No data received from SAA7118 VIP" 20300 "" 20301 "Error audio encoder SRAM access cannot initial-

ise I2C"

20302 "Error audio encoder SRAM access cannot res et

DSP through I2C"

20303 "Error audio encoder SRAM access cannot down-

load boot" 20304 "Error audio encoder cannot download test code" 20305 "Error audio encoder cannot obtain result of test" 20306 "Error audio encoder SRAM access stuck-at- zero

data line " 20307 "Error audio encoder SRAM access stuck-at-one

data line " 20308 "Error audio encoder SRAM access stuck-at-one

address line " 20309 "Error audio encoder SRAM ac cess address line

address line x is connected to data line data line y" 20310 "Error audio encoder SRAM access address lines

address line x and address line y are connected " 20311 "Error audio encoder SRAM access data lines data

line x and data line y are connected " 20312 "Error audio encoder SRAM access illegal data re-

ceived" 20400 "" 20401 "Error audio encoder access cannot initialise I2C" 20402 "Error audio encoder access cannot reset DSP

through I2C" 20403 "Error audio encoder accessing ICR register" 20404 "Error audio encoder access stuck-at-zero of data

line " 20405 "Error audio encoder access stuck-at-one of data

line " 20406 "Audio encoder access data lines data line x and

data line y are interconnected " 20500 "" 20501 "Error audio encoder SRAM WRR cannot initialise

I2C" 20502 "Error audio encoder SRAM WRR cannot reset

DSP through I2C" 20503 "Error audio encoder WRR cannot download boot" 20504 "Error audio encoder cannot download test code" 20505 "Error audio encoder SRAM WRR cannot obtain

result of test" 20506 "Error audio encoder WRR SRAM stuck-at-zero

data bit " 20507 "Error audio encoder WRR SRAM stuck-at-one

data bit " 20508 "Error audio encoder WRR SRAM data lines data

line x and data line y are connected" 20509 "Error audio encoder WRR SRAM illegal data re-

ceived" 20600 "" 20601 "Error audio encoder interrupt cannot initialise I2C" 20602 "Error audio encoder interrupt cannot reset DSP

through I2C" 20603 "Error audio encoder cannot download test code" 20604 "Error occurred accessing VSM" 20605 "Audio encoder interrupt not received"

Page 60

EN 60 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

Diagnostic Software

Error Nr Error String 20606 "Error occurred while activating the encoder" 20607 "Error audio encoder interrupt cannot initialise em-

press" 20608 "Error occurred while getting interrupt reason" 20700 "" 20701 "Error audio encoder I2C cannot reset DSP

through I2C" 20702 "Error audio encoder cannot download boot" 20703 "Error audio encoder cannot download TEST

code" 20704 "Error audio encoder I2C bus busy" 20705 "Error audio encoder I2C cannot write slave ad-

dress" 20706 "Error audio encoder I2C no acknowledge re-

ceived" 20707 "Error audio encoder I2C cannot send/receive da-

ta" 20708 "Error audio encoder received data through I2C

was invalid" 20800 "" 20801 "I2C access failed." 20802 "SAA7118 VIP can not be initialised." 20803 "Invalid input" 20900 "B1.B2. B3.B4. B5.B6. B7.B8. B9.B10. B11.B12." 20901 "Firmware download of EMPRESS failed" 20902 "I2C bus busy before start" 20903 "EMPRESS access time-out" 20904 "No acknowledge from the EMPRESS" 20905 "No data send to the EMPRESS" 20906 "No data received from the EMPRESS" 30000 "" 30001 "VSM SDRAM Bank1 Memory da tabus test goes

wrong." 30002 "VSM SDRAM Bank1 Memory addressbus test

goes wrong." 30003 "VSM SDRAM Bank1 Physical memory device test

goes wrong." 30004 " VSM SDRAM Bank2 Memory databus test goes

wrong." 30005 " VSM SDRAM Bank2 Memory addressbus test

goes wrong." 30006 " VSM SDRAM Bank2 Physical memory device

test goes wrong." 30007 "VSM SDRAM Bank1 VSM interrupt register A has

a -stuck at- error for value:" 30008 "VSM SDRAM Bank2 VSM interrupt register A has

a -stuck at- error for value:" 30100 "" 30101 "VSM SDRAM Bank1 Memory da tabus test goes

wrong." 30102 "VSM SDRAM Bank1 Memory addressbus test

goes wrong." 30103 "VSM SDRAM Bank1 Physical memory device test

goes wrong." 30104 " VSM SDRAM Bank2 Memory databus test goes

wrong." 30105 " VSM SDRAM Bank2 Memory addressbus test

goes wrong." 30106 " VSM SDRAM Bank2 Physical memory device

test goes wrong." 30200 "" 30201 "VSM SDRAM Bank1 Memory da tabus test goes

wrong." 30202 "VSM SDRAM Bank1 Memory addressbus test

goes wrong."

Error Nr Error String 30203 "VSM SDRAM Bank1 Physical memory device test

goes wrong."

30204 " VSM SDRAM Bank2 Memory databus test goe s

wrong."

30205 " VSM SDRAM Bank2 Memory addressbus test

goes wrong."

30206 " VSM SDRAM Bank2 Physical memory device

test goes wrong." 30300 "" 30301 "VSM interrupt register A has a -stuck at- error for

value:" 30302 "VSM interrupt register B has a -stuck at- error for

value:" 30303 "Interrupt A wasn't raised." 30304 "Interrupt B wasn't raised." 30305 "Interrupts A and B were raised." 30400 "" 30401 "VSM SDRAM Bank1 Memory databus test goes

wrong." 30402 "VSM SDRAM Bank1 Memory addressbus test

goes wrong." 30403 "VSM SDRAM Bank1 Physical memory device test

goes wrong." 30404 " VSM SDRAM Bank2 Memory databus test goe s

wrong." 30405 " VSM SDRAM Bank2 Memory addressbus test

goes wrong." 30406 " VSM SDRAM Bank2 Physical memory device

test goes wrong." 30500 "" 30501 "Communication with the analogue board fails." 30502 "Echo test to analogue board returned wrong

string." 40000 "" 40001 "NVRAM Reset; I2C failed" 40100 "NVRAM address = 0xaddress -> Byte value =

0xvalue" 40101 "NVRAM Read; I2C failed" 40102 "NVRAM Read; Invalid input" 40200 "" 40201 "NVRAM Modify; I2C failed" 40202 "NVRAM Modify; Invalid input" 40300 "DV Unique ID = id" 40301 "NVRAM Read DV Unique ID; I2C failed" 40400 "\r\n Error log:\r\n errorString \r\n Ö " 40401 "NVRAM error log; I2C failed" 40402 "NVRAM error log is invalid" 40403 "Front panel failed" 40700 "" 40701 "NVRAM error log reset; I2C failed" 40900 "Region code Change counter is reset" 40901 "NVRAM region code reset; I2C failed" 41000 "" 41001 "NVRAM Store DV Unique ID; I2C failed" 41002 "NVRAM Store DV Unique ID; Invalid input" 50000 "" 50007 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 50008 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 50009 "The echo from the frontpanel processor was not

correct." 50100 " Front panel version: FPversion "

Page 61

Diagnostic Software

EN 61DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

Error Nr Error String 50102 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed."

50103 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 50200 "" 50204 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 50205 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 50206 "The frontpanel did not show a starburst." 50207 "The user skipped the FP-which pattern test." 50208 "The user returned an unknown confirmation: con-

firmation " 50209 "The frontpanel did not show horizontal segments." 50210 "The frontpanel did not show vertical segments." 50300 "" 50304 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 50305 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 50306 "The frontpanel did not light all labels." 50307 "The user skipped the rest of the FP-label test." 50308 "The user returned an unknown confirmation: con-

firmation" 50400 "" 50404 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 50405 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 50406 "The LED's could not be turned on." 50407 "The user skipped the rest of the FP-LED test." 50408 "The user returned an unknown confirmation: con-

firmation" 50500 "" 50502 "Front panel Keyboard; test failed" 50503 "Front panel Keyboard; test aborted" 50504 "Front panel Keyboard; not all keys were pressed" 50505 "Front panel keyboard I2C connection failed" 50506 "Unable to get slashversion" 50600 "" 50602 "Front panel Remote control; test failed" 50603 "Front panel Remote control; test aborted" 50604 "Front panel remote control; can not access FP" 50605 "Front panel remote control; no user input re-

ceived" 50700 "" 50701 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 50702 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 50703 "The frontpanel did not show a starburst." 50704 "The user skipped the FP-starburst test." 50705 "The user returned an unknown confirmation: con-

firmation " 50800 "" 50801 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 50802 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 50803 "The frontpanel did not show vertical segments." 50804 "The user skipped the FP-vertical segments test." 50805 "The user returned an unknown confirmation: con-

firmation " 50900 ""

Error Nr Error String 50901 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed."

50902 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 50903 "The frontpanel did not show horizontal segments." 50904 "The user skipped the FP-horizontal segments

test." 50905 "The user returned an unknown confirmation: con-

firmation " 51400 "" 51401 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 51402 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 51403 "The beeper did not sound." 51404 "The user skipped the FP-Beep test." 51405 "The user returned an unknown confirmation: con-

firmation" 51500 "" 51501 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 51502 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 51503 "The discbar did not display properly." 51504 "The user skipped the discbar test." 51505 "The user returned an unknown confirmation: con-

firmation" 51600 "" 51601 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 51602 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 51603 "The discbar dots did not display properly." 51604 "The user skipped the discbar dots test." 51605 "The user returned an unknown confirmation: con-

firmation" 51700 "" 51701 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 51702 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 51703 "The VU grid did not display properly." 51704 "The user skipped the VU gridtest." 51705 "The user returned an unknown confirmation: con-

firmation" 51800 "" 51801 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 51802 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 51803 "The frontpanel could not be dimmed." 51804 "The user skipped the FP-Dim test." 51805 "The user returned an unknown confirmation: con-

firmation" 51900 "" 51901 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 51902 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 51903 "The frontpanel did not show segments blinking." 51904 "The user skipped the FP-blinking test." 51905 "The user returned an unknown confirmation: con-

firmation" 52000 ""

Page 62

EN 62 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

Diagnostic Software

Error Nr Error String 52001 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed."

52002 "The frontpanel could not be accessed by the ana-

logue board." 52003 "The frontpanel did not show all segments lit." 52004 "The user skipped the FP-light all segments test." 52005 "The user returned an unknown confirmation: con-

firmation" 52200 "" 52201 "Communication with Analogue Board fails." 52202 "Frontpanel can not be accessed by the Analogue

Board." 52300 "" 52301 "Communication with Analogue Board fails." 52302 "Frontpanel can not be accessed by the Analogue

Board." 60000 "" 60100 "" 60101 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 60102 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 60103 "Communication time-out error" 60104 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 60105 "Echo loop could not be closed" 60106 "Wrong echo pattern received" 60200 "Version: nr1.nr2.nr3" 60201 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 60202 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 60203 "Communication time-out error" 60204 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 60205 "Front Panel failed." 60300 "" 60301 "Basic-Engine time-out error" 60400 "" 60401 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 60402 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 60403 "Communication time-out error" 60404 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 60405 "Focus loop could not be closed" 60500 "" 60501 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 60502 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 60503 "Communication time-out error" 60504 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 60600 "" 60601 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 60602 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 60603 "Communication time-out error" 60604 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 60700 "" 60701 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 60702 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 60703 "Communication time-out error" 60704 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 60800 "" 60801 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 60802 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial"

Error Nr Error String 60803 "Communication time-out error" 60804 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 60805 "Radial loop could not be closed" 60900 "" 60901 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 60902 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 60903 "Communication time-out error" 60904 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 61500 "" 61501 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 61502 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 61503 "Communication time-out error" 61504 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 61600 "" 61601 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 61602 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 61603 "Communication time-out error" 61604 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 61700 "" 61701 "BE tray-in command failed" 61702 "BE read-TOC command failed" 61703 "BE VSM interrupt initialisation failed" 61704 "BE set irq command failed" 61705 "BE no disc or wrong disc inserted" 61706 "BE rec-pause command failed" 61707 "BE VSM BE out DMA initialisation failed" 61708 "BE VSM BE out initialisation failed" 61709 "BE VSM BE out DMA start failed" 61710 "BE VSM BE out start failed" 61711 "BE rec command failed" 61712 "BE VSM out underrun error occurred" 61713 "BE record complete interrupt not raised" 61714 "BE get irq command failed" 61715 "BE no interrupt was raised by BE" 61716 "BE VSM DMA out not finished" 61717 "BE stop command after writing failed" 61718 "BE VSM Sector processor initialisation failed" 61719 "BE VSM sector processor DMA initialisation

failed" 61720 "BE VSM sector processor DMA start failed" 61721 "BE VSM sector processor start failed" 61722 "BE seek command failed" 61723 "BE VSM sector processor error occurred" 61724 "BE read timeout occurred" 61725 "BE stop command after reading failed" 61726 "BE difference found in data at disc sector

0xdiscsector" 61727 "This nucleus cannot be executed because the

Self-Test failed" 61800 "" 61801 "BE i2c initialisation failed" 61802 "This nucleus cannot be executed because the

Self-Test failed" 61900 "" 61901 "The SelfTest failed with result: 0xnr1 0xnr2 0xnr3" 61902 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 61903 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 61904 "Communication time-out error"

Page 63

Diagnostic Software

EN 63DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

Error Nr Error String 61905 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 62000 "" 62001 "Self-Test : errorstring1 Laser-Test :

errorstring2 SpindleM-Test: errorstring3 Sledg-

eM-Test : errorstring4 Focus-Test : errorstring5" 62100 "The forward sense level is 0xlevel" 62101 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 62102 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 62103 "Communication time-out error" 62104 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 62200 "" 62201 "The BE-self-diagnostic-spindle-motor-test failed" 62202 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 62203 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 62204 "Communication time-out error" 62205 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 62300 "" 62301 "The BE-focus-test failed" 62302 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 62303 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 62304 "Communication time-out error" 62305 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 62400 "" 62401 "The BE-self-diagnostic-sledge-motor-test failed" 62402 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 62403 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 62404 "Communication time-out error" 62405 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 62500 "" 62600 "" 62700 "BE EEPROM address = address -> By te value =

0xvalue" 62701 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 62702 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 62703 "Communication time-out error" 62704 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 62705 "BE read EEPROM; invalid input" 62800 "" 62801 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 62802 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 62803 "Communication time-out error" 62804 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 62805 "BE write EEPROM; invalid input" 62900 "" 62901 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 62902 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 62903 "Communication time-out error" 62904 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 62905 "Radial loop could not be closed" 63000 "" 63001 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 63002 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 63003 "Communication time-out error" 63004 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine"

Error Nr Error String 63100 " Number of times Tray went Open/Closed : nr1""

Total hours the CD laser was on : nr2"" Total hours the DVD laser was on : nr3"" Total hours the write laser was on : nr4"

63101 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 63102 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 63103 "Communication time-out error" 63104 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 63200 "" 63201 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 63202 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 63203 "Communication time-out error" 63204 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 63300 Momentary errors (Byte 1 - Byte 7) : 0xb1 0xb2

0xb3 0xb4 0xb5 0xb6 0xb7 Cumulative errors

(Byte 1 - Byte 7): : 0xb1 0xb2 0xb3 0xb4 0xb5 0xb6

0xb7 Fatal errors (Oldest - Youngest) : : 0xb1

0xb2 0xb3 0xb4 0xb5 63301 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 63302 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 63303 "Communication time-out error" 63304 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 63400 "" 63401 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 63402 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 63403 "Communication time-out error" 63404 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 63500 "" 63501 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 63502 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 63503 "Communication time-out error" 63504 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 63505 "errorstring ÖThe basic engine will reject all player

commands" 63900 "" 63901 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 63902 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 63903 "Communication time-out error" 63904 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 64000 "BE OPU number = opunumber" 64001 "Basic Engine returned error number

0xerrornumber" 64002 "Parity error from Basic Engine to Serial" 64003 "Communication time-out error" 64004 "Unexpected response from Basic Engine" 64100 "The data was successfully written on and read

from a DVD disc" 64101 "The tray-in command failed" 64102 "The read-TOC command failed" 64103 "The VSM interrupt initialisation failed" 64104 "The set irq command failed" 64105 "No disc or wrong disc inserted" 64106 "The rec-pause command failed" 64107 "The VSM BE out DMA initialisation failed" 64108 "The VSM BE out initialisation failed" 64109 "The VSM BE out DMA start failed" 64110 "The VSM BE out start failed" 64111 "The rec command failed"

Page 64

EN 64 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

Diagnostic Software

Error Nr Error String 64112 "The VSM out underrun error occurred" 64113 "The record complete interrupt was not raised" 64114 "The get irq command failed" 64115 "There was no interrupt raised by BE" 64116 "The VSM DMA did not finished" 64117 "The stop command after writing failed" 64118 "The VSM Sector processor initialisation failed" 64119 "The VSM sector processor DMA initialisation

failed" 64120 "The VSM sector processor DMA start failed" 64121 "The VSM sector processor start failed" 64122 "The seek command failed" 64123 "The VSM sector processor error occurred" 64124 "The read timeout occurred" 64125 "The stop command after reading failed" 64126 "There was a difference found in data at a specific

disc sector" 64127 "The result of the self test contains errors" 64128 "An error interrupt was raised by BE" 64129 "The calibrate-record command failed" 64130 "To many retries" 64131 "BE update RAI command after writing failed" 64132 "BE find first recordable address command failed" 64133 "DVD+R disc is full" 64200 "" 64201 "BE i2c initialisation failed" 64202 "This nucleus cannot be executed because the

Self-Test faile d " 70000 "Echo test OK" 70001 "Echo test returned wrong string." 70002 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 70300 "SoftwareVersion" 70301 "Can not find segment in FLASH ROM on the Ana-

logue Board" 70302 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 70400 "HardwareVersion" 70401 "Can not find segment in FLASH ROM on the Ana-

logue Board" 70402 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 70500 "Clock adjusted OK" 70501 "Can not adjust the clock on the Analogue Board." 70502 "Wrong date/time text size." 70503 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 70600 "Tuner accessibility test OK" 70601 "Can not access tuner on the Analogue Board." 70602 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 70700 "Frequency download OK" 70701 "Wrong frequency table size." 70702 "Can not download the frequency table into the an-

alogue NVRAM." 70703 "Can not download the frequency table into the an-

alogue NVRAM." 70704 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 70800 "Data slicer test OK" 70801 "Test of the Data slicer on the Analogue Board

fails." 70802 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 70900 "Sound Processor test OK" 70901 "Test of the Sound Processor on the Analogue

Board fails." 70902 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 71000 "AV Selector test OK"

Error Nr Error String 71001 "Test of the AV Selector on the Analogue Board

fails." 71002 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 71100 "NVRAM test OK" 71101 "Test of the NVRAM on the Analogue Board fails." 71102 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 71200 "Video routing on the Analogue Board OK" 71201 "Routing the video on the Analogue Board fails." 71202 "Invalid input." 71203 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 71300 "Audio routing on the Analogue Board OK" 71301 "Routing the audio on the Analogue Board fails." 71302 "Invalid input." 71303 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 71500 "" 71501 "Invalid slash version, default slash version is set." 71502 "Setting the slash version on the Analogue Board

fails." 71503 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 71600 "ApplicationVersion" 71601 "Can not find segment in FLASH ROM on the Ana-

logue Board" 71602 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 71700 "DiagnosticsVersion" 71701 "Can not find segment in FLASH ROM on the Ana-

logue Board" 71702 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 71800 "DownloadVersion" 71801 "Can not find segment in FLASH ROM on the Ana-

logue Board" 71802 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 72300 "" 72000 "" 72001 "Adjusting BarGraphLevel failed" 72002 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 72100 "" 72101 "Storing clock correction failed" 72102 "Value out of range : default value stored " 72103 "Invalid input." 72104 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 72200 "" 72201 "Initialising the 1Hz signal on the Clock IC failed" 72202 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 72301 "Clearing the NVRAM on the Analogue Board fails" 72302 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 72400 "segment checksum is : checksum which is cor-

rect" for every segment 72401 "segment could not be found" or "segment check-

sum is : checksumC ,however it should be : check-

sumE" for every segment 72402 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 72900 "Date received" 72901 "Data returned" 72902 "Communication on I2C-bus failed on the Ana-

logue Board fails." 72903 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 73000 "" 73001 "Storing the external presets on the Analogue

Board fails" 73002 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 73100 "0xslashversion" where slashversion is the slash

version read from the analogue board 73101 "Error while reading out slash version."

Page 65

Diagnostic Software

EN 65DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

Error Nr Error String 73102 "I2C Write error." 73103 "I2C Read error." 73104 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 73200 "" 73201 "Storing the Reference Voltage for the Tuner

failed" 73202 "Invalid input." 73203 "Communication with Analogue Board fails" 80000 "The DVIO module is present in the system." 80001 "The DVIO module is not present in the system." 80100 "The DVIO module has been reset OK." 80101 "The DVIO module is not present in the system." 80102 "The DVIO module could not be reset." 80103 "Could not initialise I2C before Reset." 80200 "The accessibility of the DVIO module is OK." 80201 "The DVIO board is not present in this DVDR." 80202 "Could not initialise I2C." 80203 "Unable to reset the DVIO module." 80204 "Unable to receive the reset indication from the

DVIO module." 80205 "Unable to send the configuration to the DVIO

module." 80206 "Unable to download the chip ID to the DVIO mod-

ule." 80207 "Unable to set the mode of the DVIO module to

IDLE." 80208 "Software Error in function HandleStateAwaitin-

gReply !!" 80209 "Maximal number of retries reached by HandleS-

tateSending !!" 80210 "Maximal number of retries (NACKs) reached

(HandleStateSending)" 80211 "We tried to receive a reply for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_ACKREPLY times !!" 80212 "We tried to receive a reply for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_REPLY times !!" 80213 "We tried to receive an Ack for

DVIO_MAX_ RE T R IES_ACK times!!" 80214 "VSM UART error timeout transmitting command" 80215 "VSM UART error timeout receiving reply" 80216 "VSM UART frame error occurred receiving from

DVIO board" 80217 "VSM UART parity error occurred receiving from

DVIO board" 80218 "The confirmation/indication from the DVIO module

is invalid." 80300 "The accessibility of the DVIO module is OK." 80301 "The DVIO board is not present in this DVDR." 80302 "Could not initialise I2C." 80303 "Unable to reset the DVIO module." 80304 "Unable to receive the reset indication from the

DVIO module." 80305 "Unable to send the configuration to the DVIO

module." 80306 "Unable to download the chip ID to the DVIO mod-

ule." 80307 "Unable to set the mode of the DVIO module to

IDLE." 80308 "Software Error in function HandleStateAwaitin-

gReply !!" 80309 "Maximal number of retries reached by HandleS-

tateSending !!" 80310 "Maximal number of retries (NACKs) reached

(HandleStateSending)"

Error Nr Error String 80311 "We tried to receive a reply for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_ACKREPLY times !!"

80312 "We tried to receive a reply for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_REP LY times !!"

80313 "We tried to receive an Ack for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_ACK times!!" 80314 "VSM UART error timeout transmitting command" 80315 "VSM UART error timeout receiving reply" 80316 "VSM UART frame error occurred receiving from

DVIO board" 80317 "VSM UART parity error occurred receiving from

DVIO board" 80318 "The confirmation/indication from the DVIO module

is invalid." 80400 "The accessibility of the DVIO module is OK." 80401 "The DVIO board is not present in this DVDR." 80402 "Could not initialise I2C." 80403 "Unable to reset the DVIO module." 80404 "Unable to receive the reset indication from the

DVIO module." 80405 "Unable to send the configuration to the DVIO

module." 80406 "Unable to download the chip ID to the DVIO mod-

ule." 80407 "Unable to set the mode of the DVIO module to

IDLE." 80408 "Software Error in function HandleStateAwaitin-

gReply !!" 80409 "Maximal number of retries reached by H andleS-

tateSending !!" 80410 "Maximal number of retries (NACKs) reached

(HandleStateSending)" 80411 "We tried to receive a reply for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_ACKREPLY times !!" 80412 "We tried to receive a reply for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_REP LY times !!" 80413 "We tried to receive an Ack for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_ACK times!!" 80414 "VSM UART error timeout transmitting command" 80415 "VSM UART error timeout receiving reply" 80416 "VSM UART frame error occurred receiving from

DVIO board" 80417 "VSM UART parity error occurred receiving from

DVIO board" 80418 "The confirmation/indication from the DVIO module

is invalid." 80500 "" 80501 "The DVIO board is not present in this DVDR." 80502 "The I2C could not be initialised." 80503 "The DVIO module could not be reset." 80504 "Unable to receive the reset indication from the

DVIO module." 80505 "Unable to send the configuration to the DVIO

module." 80506 "Unable to download the chip ID to the DVIO mod-

ule." 80507 "Unable to set the mode of the DVIO module to

IDLE." 80508 "Software Error in HandleStateAwaitingReply func-

tion!" 80509 "Maximal number of retries reached by H andleS-

tateSending!" 80510 "Maximal number of retries (NACK's) reached

"(HandleStateSending) 80511 "We tried to receive a reply for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_ACKREPLY times!"

Page 66

EN 66 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

Diagnostic Software

Error Nr Error String 80512 "We tried to receive a reply for

DVIO_MAX_RETR IES_REPLY times!"

80513 "We tried to receive an Acknowledge for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_ACK times!" 80514 "VSM UART error timeout transmitting command" 80515 "VSM UART error timeout receiving reply" 80516 "VSM UART frame error occurred receiving from

DVIO board" 80517 "VSM UART parity error occurred receiving from

DVIO board" 80518 "The confirmation/indication from the DVIO module

is invalid." 80519 "Setting the DVIO module in/out diagnostics mode

failed" 80520 "Invalid input" 80521 "Getting the errors of the self-test failed" 80522 "Self-test failed" 80600 "" 80601 "The DVIO board is not present in this DVDR." 80602 "The I2C could not be initialised." 80603 "The DVIO module could not be reset." 80604 "Unable to receive the reset indication from the

DVIO module." 80605 "Unable to send the configuration to the DVIO

module." 80606 "Unable to download the chip ID to the DVIO mod-

ule." 80607 "Unable to set the mode of the DVIO mo dule to

IDLE." 80608 "Software Error in HandleStateAwaitingReply func-

tion!" 80609 "Maximal number of retries reached by HandleS-

tateSending!" 80610 "Maximal number of retries (NACK's) reached

"(HandleStateSending) 80611 "We tried to receive a reply for

DVIO_MAX_RETR IE S_ACKREPLY times!" 80612 "We tried to receive a reply for

DVIO_MAX_RETR IES_REPLY times!" 80613 "We tried to receive an Acknowledge for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_ACK times!" 80614 "VSM UART error timeout transmitting command" 80615 "VSM UART error timeout receiving reply" 80616 "VSM UART frame error occurred receiving from

DVIO board" 80617 "VSM UART parity error occurred receiving from

DVIO board" 80618 "The confirmation/indication from the DVIO module

is invalid." 80619 "Setting the DVIO module in/out diagnostics mode

failed" 80700 "" 80701 "The DVIO board is not present in this DVDR." 80702 "The I2C could not be initialised." 80703 "The DVIO module could not be reset." 80704 "Unable to receive the reset indication from the

DVIO module." 80705 "Unable to send the configuration to the DVIO

module." 80706 "Unable to download the chip ID to the DVIO mod-

ule." 80707 "Unable to set the mode of the DVIO mo dule to

IDLE." 80708 "Software Error in HandleStateAwaitingReply func-

tion!"

Error Nr Error String 80709 "Maximal number of retries reached by HandleS-

tateSending!"

80710 "Maximal number of retries (NACK's) reached

"(HandleStateSending)

80711 "We tried to receive a reply for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_ACKREPLY times!"

80712 "We tried to receive a reply for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_REPLY times!"

80713 "We tried to receive an Acknowledge for

DVIO_MAX_RETRIES_ACK times!" 80714 "VSM UART error timeout transmitting command" 80715 "VSM UART error timeout receiving reply" 80716 "VSM UART frame error occurred receiving from

DVIO board" 80717 "VSM UART parity error occurred receiving from

DVIO board" 80718 "The confirmation/indication from the DVIO module

is invalid." 80719 "Setting the DVIO module in/out diagnostics mode

failed" 90121 "Error: audio data in host memory contains w rong

frequency: frequency Hz" 90122 "Error: audio data in host memory contains si-

lence!" 90123 "There is no correct audio frame in the buffer" 90124 "The audio frame has an illegal version bit" 90125 "The audio frame has an illegal bitrate-index" 90126 "The audio frame has an illegal sampling rate" 90127 "The CRC of the audio frame is wrong" 90128 "The audio frame is not MPEG-I layer II !" 90129 "Error cannot de-mute DAC on analogue board" 90200 "" 90201 "Initialisation of I2C failed" 90202 "Initialisation of VIP and EMPIRE failed" 90203 "Initialisation of PLL / Link failed." 90204 "Next descriptor address set wrong." 90205 "Turning on the colourbar failed" 90206 "No I2C communication possible to start video en-

coder." 90207 "Starting the video encoder failed." 90208 "Transfer of data from video encoder to VSM

failed." 90209 "Stopping the encoder failed." 90210 "Turning off the colourbar failed." 90211 "Cannot intialize hostdecoder parallel input" 90212 "Cannot initialise VSM AV-out DMA port" 90213 "Cannot initialise VSM AV-out port" 90214 "Cannot start VSM AV-out DMA port" 90215 "Cannot start VSM AV-out port" 90216 "Transfer of data from VSM to host decoder failed." 90217 "VSM and Hostdec memory do not match (com-

pared after transfer)" 90218 "Decoding of the video data in the hostdecoder

memory failed" 90219 "The data in the hostdecoder is not equal to a col-

ourbar" 90220 "The video encoder did not return the Group Of

Picture count." 90221 "The video encoder did not receive data from the

VIP." 90223 "Initialisation of VIP and EMPRESS failed" 90224 "The video encoder did not return the current sta-

tus."

Page 67

Diagnostic Software

EN 67DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

Error Nr Error String 90225 "The video encoder timed out in BUSY mode. (no

VIP input)"

90226 "The video encoder did not return the current bi-

trate."

90227 "The video encoder did not switch to ENCODING

mode."

90228 "The video encoder could not start from STOP/

IDLE mode."

90229 "The video encoder did not switch from IDLE to

STOP mode." 90300 "" 90301 "Initialisation of I2C failed" 90302 "I2C communication to VIP failed" 90303 "Initialisation of VIP failed" 90304 "Generation of Close Caption data failed" 90305 "VIP not locked to video signal" 90306 "Initialisation of VBI Extractor failed 90307 "No CC data received" 90308 "Closed Caption data overrun" 90309 "Closed Caption data does not match" 90310 "Switch off ColourBar failed" 90400 "" 90401 "Initialisation of I2C failed" 90402 "Initialisation of VIP and EMPIRE failed" 90403 "Initialisation of PLL / Link failed." 90404 "Next descriptor address set wrong." 90405 "Turning on the colourbar failed" 90406 "No I2C communication possible to start video en-

coder." 90407 "Starting the video encoder failed." 90408 "Transfer of data from video encoder to VSM

failed." 90409 "Stopping the encoder failed." 90410 "Turning off the colourbar failed." 90411 "Cannot intialize hostdecoder parallel input" 90412 "Cannot initialise VSM AV-out DMA port" 90413 "Cannot initialise VSM AV-out port" 90414 "Cannot start VSM AV-out DMA port" 90415 "Cannot start VSM AV-out port" 90416 "Transfer of data from VSM to host decoder failed." 90417 "VSM and Hostdec memory do not match (com-

pared after transfer)" 90418 "Decoding of the video data in the hostdecoder

memory failed" 90419 "The data in the hostdecoder is not equal to a col-

ourbar" 90420 "The video encoder did not return the Group Of

Picture count." 90421 "The video encoder did not receive data from the

VIP." 90422 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 90423 "Initialisation of VIP and EMPRESS failed" 90424 "The video encoder did not return the current sta-

tus." 90425 "The video encoder timed out in BUSY mode. (no

VIP input)" 90426 "The video encoder did not return the current bi-

trate." 90427 "The video encoder did not switch to ENCODING

mode." 90428 "The video encoder could not start from STOP/

IDLE mode."

Error Nr Error String 90429 "The video encoder did not switch from IDLE to

STOP mode." 90500 "" 90501 "Initialisation of I2C failed" 90502 "I2C communication to VIP failed" 90503 "Initialisation of VIP failed" 90504 "Generation of Close Caption data failed" 90505 "VIP not locked to video signal" 90506 "Initialisation of VBI Extractor failed 90507 "No CC data received" 90508 "Closed Caption data overrun" 90509 "Closed Caption data does not match" 90510 "Switch off ColourBar failed" 90511 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 90600 "" 90601 "Initialisation of I2C failed" 90602 "Initialisation of VIP and EMPIRE failed" 90603 "Initialisation of PLL / Link failed." 90604 "Next descriptor address set wrong." 90605 "Turning on the colourbar failed" 90606 "No I2C communication possible to start video en-

coder." 90607 "Starting the video encoder failed." 90608 "Transfer of data from video encoder to VSM

failed." 90609 "Stopping the encoder failed." 90610 "Turning off the colourbar failed." 90611 "Cannot intialize hostdecoder parallel input" 90612 "Cannot initialise VSM AV-out DMA port" 90613 "Cannot initialise VSM AV-out port" 90614 "Cannot start VSM AV-out DMA port" 90615 "Cannot start VSM AV-out port" 90616 "Transfer of data from VSM to host decoder failed." 90617 "VSM and Hostdec memory do not match (com -

pared after transfer)" 90618 "Decoding of the video data in the hostdecoder

memory fail ed" 90619 "The data in the hostdecoder is not equal to a col-

ourbar" 90620 "The video encoder did not return the Group Of

Picture count." 90621 "The video encoder did not receive data from the

VIP." 90622 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 90623 "Initialisation of VIP and EMPRESS failed" 90624 "The video encoder did not return the current sta-

tus." 90625 "The video encoder timed out in BUSY m ode. (no

VIP input)" 90626 "The video encoder did not return the current bi-

trate." 90627 "The video encoder did not switch to ENCODING

mode." 90628 "The video encoder could not start from STOP/

IDLE mode." 90629 "The video encoder did not switch from IDLE to

STOP mode." 90700 "" 90701 "Initialisation of I2C failed" 90702 "I2C communication to VIP failed" 90703 "Initialisation of VIP failed" 90704 "Generation of Close Caption data failed"

Page 68

EN 68 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

Diagnostic Software

Error Nr Error String 90705 "VIP not locked to video signal" 90706 "Initialisation of VBI Extractor failed 90707 "No CC data received" 90708 "Closed Caption data overrun" 90709 "Closed Caption data does not match" 90710 "Switch off ColourBar failed" 90711 "Execution of the command on the analogue board

failed." 90800 "" 90801 "Error routing the audio back to the digital board." 90802 "Error cannot initialise I2C" 90803 "Error cannot initialise VIP" 90804 "Error cannot set ADC enable pin" 90805 "Error cannot set VSM audio clock" 90806 "Error preparing the 12kHz audio-sine" 90807 "Error cannot initialise audio encoder" 90808 "Error cannot initialise VSM audio in port" 90809 "Error cannot initialise VSM audio in DMA port" 90810 "Error cannot initialise VSM audio out DMA port" 90811 "Error cannot initialise audio VSM out port" 90812 "Error cannot initialise host decoder audio in" 90813 "Error loop audio user/dealer cannot start audio en-

coder" 90814 "Error cannot start VSM audio in DMA port" 90815 "Error starting the 12kHz audio-sine" 90816 "Error transfer data from audio encoder to VSM" 90817 "Error cannot start VSM AV out DMA port" 90818 "Error cannot start VSM AV out port" 90819 "Error transfer data from VSM to host decoder" 90820 "Error: audio data in host memory and VSM mem-

ory differ" 90821 "Error: audio data in host memory contains wrong

frequency: frequency Hz" 90822 "Error: audio data in host memory contains si-

lence!" 90823 "There is no correct audio frame in the buffer" 90824 "The audio frame has an illegal version bit" 90825 "The audio frame has an illegal bitrate-index" 90826 "The audio frame has an illegal sampling rate" 90827 "The CRC of the audio frame is wrong" 90828 "The audio frame is not MPEG-I layer II !" 90829 "Error cannot de-mute DAC on analogue board" 90900 "" 90901 "Error routing the audio back to the digital board." 90902 "Error cannot initialise I2C" 90903 "Error cannot initialise VIP" 90904 "Error cannot set ADC enable pin" 90905 "Error cannot set VSM audio clock" 90906 "Error preparing the 12kHz audio-sine" 90907 "Error cannot initialise audio encoder" 90908 "Error cannot initialise VSM audio in port" 90909 "Error cannot initialise VSM audio in DMA port" 90910 "Error cannot initialise VSM audio out DMA port" 90911 "Error cannot initialise audio VSM out port" 90912 "Error cannot initialise host decoder audio in" 90913 "Error loop audio user/dealer cannot start audio en-

coder" 90914 "Error cannot start VSM audio in DMA port" 90915 "Error starting the 12kHz audio-sine" 90916 "Error transfer data from audio encoder to VSM" 90917 "Error cannot start VSM AV out DMA port" 90918 "Error cannot start VSM AV out port"

Error Nr Error String 90919 "Error transfer data from VSM to host decoder" 90920 "Error: audio data in host memory and VSM mem -

ory differ"

90921 "Error: audio data in host memory contains w rong

frequency: frequency Hz"

90922 "Error: audio data in host memory contains si-

lence!" 90923 "There is no correct audio frame in the buffer" 90924 "The audio frame has an illegal version bit" 90925 "The audio frame has an illegal bitrate-index" 90926 "The audio frame has an illegal sampling rate" 90927 "The CRC of the audio frame is wrong" 90928 "The audio frame is not MPEG-I layer II !" 90929 "Error cannot de-mute DAC on analogue board" 140000 "" 140001 "I2C to Clock failed" or "I2C initialisation failed" 140100 "" 140101 "I2C to Clock failed" or "I2C initialisation failed" 141200 "" 141201 "Progressive Scan Board I2C bus busy" 141211 "Progressive Scan Board I2C FLI2200 bus busy" 141212 "Progressive Scan Board I2C FLI2200 read access

time-out" 141213 "Progressive Scan Board I2C FLI2200 no read ac-

knowledge" 141214 "Progressive Scan Board I2C FLI2200 read failed" 141215 "Progressive Scan Board I2C FLI2200 write ac-

cess time-out" 141216 "Progressive Scan Board I2C FLI2200 no write ac-

knowledge" 141217 "Progressive Scan Board I2C FLI2200 write failed" 141218 "Progressive Scan Board I2C FLI2200 failed" 141221 "Progressive Scan Board I2C AD7196 bus busy" 141222 "Progressive Scan Board I2C AD7196 read access

time-out" 141223 "Progressive Scan Board I2C AD7196 no read ac-

knowledge" 141224 "Progressive Scan Board I2C AD7196 read failed" 141225 "Progressive Scan Board I2C AD7196 write ac-

cess time-out" 141226 "Progressive Scan Board I2C AD7196 no write ac-

knowledge" 141227 "Progressive Scan Board I2C AD7196 write failed" 141228 "Progressive Scan Board I2C AD7196 failed" 141300 "" 141301 "Progressive Scan Route Enable failed" 141302 "Generating test image in Hostdecoder failed" 141400 "" 141401 "Progressive Scan Route Disable failed" 141402 "Turning off test image in Hostdecoder failed" 141500 "" 141501 "Progressive Scan Board I2C failed" 141600 "" 141601 "Progressive Scan Board I2C failed"

Page 69

Diagnostic Software

DVIO 1.8 Error Codes

Error Code Id Description Hardware

0 0x00 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_OK No Error 6 0x06 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_U NKNO WN Unknown Error(including UART communication

error) 17 0x11 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_TNF_1 Link chip incorrect responding µPD72893, Link 18 0x12 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_TNF_2 No link register access or link reset failed µPD72893, Link 23 0x17 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_TNF_7 Link reset failed µPD72893, Link 38 0x26 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_TNF_16 Expecting no 1394 node with GUID connectivity,

while detecting connection 39 0x27 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_TNF_17 Expecting 1394 node with GUID connectivity, while

not detecting connection 48 0x30 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_UPINTRAMAInternal ram problem in address lines µPD78F0988,

Wrapper

50 0x32 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_UPEXTRAMAExternal ram problem in address lines µPD4564163G5,

SDRAM

51 0x33 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_UPEXTRAMDExternal ram problem in data lines µPD4564163G5,

SDRAM

58 0x3A DVIOC_ERR_DDS_ROMCHK Checksum of codespace 0x0000-0x1f80, 0x2000-

0xeffd is not correct 244 0xF4 DVIOC_ERR_LINK_HWPHY PHY chip not responding(PHY down report received) µPD72852, Phy 245 0xF5 DVIOC_ERR_LINK_HWLINK LINK chip not responding µPD72893, Link

µPD78F0988, Wrapper

EN 69DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

5.5 Loop tests

The following loops can be distinguished:

• Loops performed on the digital board only

• User Dealer loops performed on the digital and analogue board

• System loops performed via an external connection: outputs are looped back to the inputs.

Page 70

EN 70 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

0 0

Diagnostic Software

5.5.1 Nucleus 900: Digital Audio Loop

This nucleus tests the audio path through the digital board

NUCLEUS 900: AUDIO LOOP DIGITAL

ANALOGUE BOARD

DIGITAL BOARD

7500

VIP

VIP_ICLK: 27MHz

7403

EMPRESS

GND

Figure 5-9

STI 5508

VSM

TR 01008_002 251102

7200

7100

5.5.2 Nucleus 901: Audio User Dealer Loop

This Nucleus is only possible in NAFTA sets. A PCM audio sine of 12kHz is generated in the Host Decoder for a while and sent to the analogue board. The signal coming from the analogue board is encoded again and sent to the memory of the host decoder for comparison. This nucleus tests the components on the audio signal path:

• Host decoder

• Flex connection between connector 1602 (digital board) and connector 1900 (analogue board)

•DAC

• Op-amp

• Scart switch IC

•ADC

• Audio Encoder

•VIP

•VSM

NUCLEUS 901: AUDIO USER DEALER LOOP

FRONT AV BOARD

CINCH IN

connector

1911

CINCH OUT

ANALOGUE BOARD

connector

1942

7501

HEF4052

DIGITAL BOARD

VIP

7500

7004

ADC

connector

1900

connector

1602

I2S I2S

7002

DAC

connector

1900

connector

1602

STI 5508

7001

7200

7403

EMPRESS

VIP_ICLK: 27MHz

7100

VSM

TR 05003_0

2511

Figure 5-10

Page 71

Diagnostic Software

EN 71DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

5.5.3 Nucleus 902: Digital Video Loop

A colourbar generated in the host decoder is looped through the VIP, Empire, and VSM and checked again in the host decoder. The following components are tested on the video signal path:

•VIP

•Empire

• VSM

• Host decoder

NUCLEUS 902: DIGITAL VIDEO LOOP

ANALOGUE BOARD

7408

STV6618

5.5.4 Nucleus 903: Digital Vi de o VBI Loop

Nucleus for testing the components on the video VBI signal path:

• The VIP

• The VSM

• The Host Decoder This is done by using the internal test signal source (digital board only) Remark: this test is only successful if nucleus 121 is carried out first.

NUCLEUS 903: DIGITAL VIDEO VBI LOOP

ANALOGUE BOARD

7408

STV6618

DIGITAL BOARD

7500

VIP

VIP_ICLK: 27MHz

7403

EMPRESS

Figure 5-11

STI 5508

VSM

TR 01010_002 251102

7200

7100

DIGITAL BOARD

7500

VIP

VIP_ICLK: 27MHz

7403

EMPRESS

Figure 5-12

7200

STI 5508

7100

VSM

TR 01011_002 251102

Page 72

EN 72 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

Diagnostic Software

5.5.5 Nucleus 904: System Video Loop

Nucleus for testing the components on the video signal system path:

• The VIP

• The video encoder

• The VSM

• The host decoder

• The analogue board On the analogue board the video signal will be routed to the SCART (EUROPE) or CINCH (NAFTA). There it will be looped back externally by means of the proper cable

NUCLEUS 904: SYSTEM VIDEO LOOP

SCART AUX (EUR) CINCH IN (NAFTA)

ANALOGUE BOARD

7408

STV6618

SCART TV (EUR) CINCH OUT (NAFTA)

5.5.6 Nucleus 905: System Video VBI Loop

This nucleus tests the components on the video signal path:

• The VIP

• The VSM

• The Host Decoder

The video CVBS signal is routed to the output of the analogue board where it will be looped back by means of an external cable Remark: this test is only successful if nucleus 121 is carried out first.

NUCLEUS 905: SYSTEM VIDEO VBI LOOP

SCART AUX (EUR) CINCH IN (NAFTA)

SCART TV (EUR) CINCH OUT (NAFTA)

ANALOGUE BOARD

7408

STV6618

connector

VIP

1947

1601

DIGITAL BOARD

7500

VIP_ICLK: 27MHz

EMPRESS

EPG BOARD optional

7403

Figure 5-13

connector

1947

connector

1601

STI 5508

VSM

TR 01012_003 130303

7200

7100

VIP

connector

1947

connector

1601

7500

EPG BOARD optional

DIGITAL BOARD

VIP_ICLK: 27MHz

EMPRESS

Figure 5-14

7403

connector

1947

connector

1601

STI 5508

VSM

TR 01013_003 130303

7200

7100

Page 73

Diagnostic Software

EN 73DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

5.5.7 Nucleus 906: Video User Dealer Loop

Nucleus for testing the components on the video signal system path:

• The VIP

• The video encoder

• The VSM

• The host decoder

• The analogue board On the analogue board, the video signal is internally routed back to the digital board.

NUCLEUS 906: VIDEO USER DEALER LOOP

ANALOGUE BOARD

7408

STV6618

5.5.8 Nucleus 907: Video VBI User Dealer Loop

This nucleus tests the components on the video VBI signal path:

• The VIP

• The VSM

• The Host Decoder The signal is routed back internally on the analogue board Remark: this test is only successful if nucleus 121 is carried out first.

NUCLEUS 907: VIDEO VBI USER DEALER LOOP

ANALOGUE BOARD

7408

STV6618

VIP

connector

1947

connector

1601

7500

EPG BOARD optional

DIGITAL BOARD

VIP_ICLK: 27MHz

7403

EMPRESS

Figure 5-15

connector

1947

connector

1601

STI 5508

VSM

TR 01014_003 130303

7200

7100

VIP

connector

1947

connector

1601

7500

EPG BOARD optional

DIGITAL BOARD

VIP_ICLK: 27MHz

7403

EMPRESS

Figure 5-16

connector

1947

connector

1601

STI 5508

VSM

TR 01015_003 130303

7200

7100

Page 74

EN 74 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

Diagnostic Software

5.5.9 Nucleus 908: System Audio Loop Scart (Europe)

Nucleus for testing the components on the audio signal path:

• The hostdecoder

• The analogue board

• The audio encoder

• The VSM On the analogue board, audio is passed to the SCART connector, where a SCART cable needs to be used to loop back the audio signal to the digital board

NUCLEUS 908 : AUDIO USER DEALER LOOP

ANALOGUE BOARD

SCART TVSCART AUX

7501

HEF4052

7004

ADC

connector

1900

HEF4052

7002

DAC

connector

1900

7504

7001

5.5.10 Nucleus 909: System Audio Loop CINCH (Nafta)

Nucleus for testing the components on the audio signal path:

• The hostdecoder

• The analogue board

• The audio encoder

• The VSM

A parameter has to be specified to select the appropriate output routing. This parameter is identical to nucleus 713.

NUCLEUS 909 : AUDIO USER DEALER LOOP

ANALOGUE BOARD

CINCH IN (NAFTA)

7501

HEF4052

7004

ADC

connector

1900

CINCH OUT (NAFTA)

7002

DAC

connector

1900

7001

DIGITAL BOARD

VIP

7500

connector

1602

VIP_ICLK: 27MHz

I2S I2S

7403

EMPRESS

Figure 5-17

connector

1602

STI 5508

VSM

TR 01016_002 251102

7200

7100

connector

DIGITAL BOARD

1602

I2S I2S

7500

VIP

7403

EMPRESS

VIP_ICLK: 27MHz

Figure 5-18

5.5.11 Nucleus 910: DVIO Video Input

Nucleus for testing the components on the video signal path:

• The DVIO board

• The VIP

• The video encoder

• The VSM

• The host decoder

connector

1602

STI 5508

VSM

TR 01017_002 251102

7200

7100

Note :This T est is not v alid f or Nafta in D VDR-Lead. F or Europe the sound will be available on scart 2.

5.5.12 Nucleus 911: DVIO Video VIP

Nucleus for testing the components on the video signal system path:

• The host decoder

• The analogue board

• The VIP

On the analogue board the video signal will be routed accord-

Page 75

Diagnostic Software

ing to the parameter. There it will be looped back externally by means of the proper cable.

The correct Routing path has to be selected by a parameter:

Analog board Version

01 1 712.21

11 1 712.21

31 2 712.17 31 3 721.18 31 3 712.19

41 2 712.17 41 3 712.18 41 4 712.19 41 5 712.20

71 4 712.19

Remark: Nucleus 704 gives the analog board version

Selectable parameter

Internal call to nucleus 712

EN 75DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5.

Page 76

EN 76 DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x15.

Diagnostic Software

Page 77

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

6. Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

EN 77DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6.

AUDIO L

FRONT

Analog input

AUDIO R

CVBS

S-VIDEO

FRONT

Digital Video input

IEEE 1394

NOT USED IN DVDR70

DVD & RW ENGINE

TRAY CONTROL

SERVO

DISC

LASER

READ

WRITE

1234567

INFRA RED EYE

DISPLAY & CONTROL

+3V3

+5V

GND

PSU

+4V6E

GND

124

1922

AFCRI

AFCLI

CVBSFIN

CFIN

YFIN

1402

GND

-5V

+12V

1000

FRONT PROCESSOR

1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9

DATA &CONTROL

S2B

BE_FAN

RESETN_BE

BE_LOADN

FRONT-END I2S

DVIO 1.8

1901

PHY

DIGITAL PCB 1.5/1.9

1902

S2B

VSM

Stream Manager

I2S

SDRAM

+3V3

GND

+12V

124

1234567

PSU

GND

+5V

8191011

DV CODEC LINK

SDRAM

VIDEO MPEG2

AUDIO

FRONT-END I2S or //

EMI BUS

-5V

ION

GND

1900

ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO

WRAPPER

AUDIO DAC

SDRAM

MPEG VIDEO

ENCODING

EMPRESS

MPEG AV DECODER + HOST (Sti5519)

2MB SDRAM

FLASH 4/6MB

+12Vstby

-Vgnstby

SDA

INT

POR_DC

5STBY

42853910

POWER OPEN/CLOSE PLAY STOP RECORD LEFT/RIGHT TRACK CHANNEL TV GUIDE

SCL

1500

ANAL.VIDEO

1910

1501

DIG.VIDEO

RS232

+3V3 +5V +12V DV_HS_OUT DV_VS DV_CLK

VSM_UART2

YUV(7:0)

1603

SERVICE

1903

(DATA+CONTROL+PSU)

1600

VIDEO INPUT PROCESSING

DIG. AUDIO

VSM_UART1

IRESET_DIG

BOARD 1/2

FOR DVDR80

ANALOG AUDIO L/R

EPG

1601

22 20 18 16

F4709

1602

A_WCLK

A_BCLK

A_DAT

3 4

SPDIF

MUTEN

AD_ACLK

D_DATAO

D_WCLK

D_BCLK

DAOUT

1604

YUV-YCVBS/C

U24

A_R

CVBS-RGB-Y/C-YUV

A_B

A_G

A_C

7 9

A_YCVBS

A_xCLK

AUDIO ENCODER I2S

D_xCLK

AUDIO PCM I2S

EPG BOARD 2/2

FOR DVDR80

OSD INSERTION

GLINK

1953

1970

ANALOG BOARD

1942

AFCRI

2 3

AFCLI

CVBSFIN

5 6

8SW

CFIN

8 9

YFIN

1986

1960

ANA_R

ANA_L

OSD INSERTION

DATA ACQUISITION OSD GENERATION

EPG PROCESSING

YUV

PSU

I2C

PSU IPOR_DC 2

I2C

1933

+3V3

+5V

GND

+4V6E

GND

-5V

ENGINE

GND

+12V

1932

uP SUB BOARD

P50

CLOCK & BACKUP

CONTROL

U21

+3V3

1234567

1947

F4712

D_CVBS

F4714

C_Y

F4716

D_C

F4718

D_R

F4720

D_G

F4722

D-B

1900

ADC

DAC

U26U25

1943

MULTI-MODE SOPS

ION

+5V

GND

9101112

GND

1923 1946

1920

+3V3

+12V

DIGITAL PCB

INTELLIGENT CONTROL

IO EXTENSION BOARD

-5V

DAOUT

FAN

12V

OPTIONAL

INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSING & SOURCE SELECTION

TUNER

IR_OUT

GLINK_RXD GLINK_TXD

ONLY FOR DVDR80

AUDIO DIGITAL FOR DVDR70/75

AUDIO L/R

SCART II AUXI/O

SCARTI TO TV

- I/O

S-VIDEO

CVBS

ANTENNA INPUT

TV OUT

MAINS AC

G LINK IR OUT G LINK UART

COMP. VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO DIGITAL

AUDIO OPTICAL

A_YCVBS F4709

A: DC, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

D_CVBS F4712

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

D_Y F4714

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

D_C F4716

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

D_R F4718 D_G F4720

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

D_B F4722

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

AD_WCLK; AE_WCLK AD_BCLK; AE_BCLK

2V / div AC 10us / div

2V / div AC 200ns / div

AD_ACLK

2V / div AC 50ns / div

TR 07001_001

110303

Page 78

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

Control Block Diagram Analog Board, uP Board

DVIO-Board Digital Board Basic Engine

EN 78DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6.

DVIO BE

I2S

FBIN

I2C

SWITCH

5SW

A_DATA D_DATA

A_RDY D_RDY

IRESET_DIG

int. RAM int. ROM

I2C_SW

ext. Latch ext. RAM ext. Flash

µP-Subprint

LEVELSW

I2C

Level

Shifter

I2C 5V

INT,IPOR_DC

I2C 3,3V

Digital Board

A0-A7 A0-A7 WE

AD0-AD7

A8-A16

Central-µP

TMP91CW12AF (3,3V Supply)

FBIN

AD0-AD7

A8-A19

BE_FAN

KILL

Control

only

Fan

IPOR

IPFAIL

AKILL

P50

P50in P50out

Fan_off

INT

Reset

FOME

Analog Board

I2S

IPFAIL

ADC/DAC

(UDA1334BTS

UDA1361TS)

PWONSW

I2C_SW

Frontend

Video

SIF1

PSS SB1 SFS_TS AFC AGC

I2C_SW

Frontend

Audio

(MSP)

I2C_SW

DataSlicer (STV5348)

Sense 3V3STBY

Reset-IC

EEPROM (M24C16)

Display Control Board

I2C

I2C_SW (for NAFTA only)

I2C

( for EUROPE

only)

I2C

INT

IPOR_DC

WU WSFI

FBIN P50 8SC2

Video

(STV6618)

VSA1 VSA2

ASC1S

For EUROPE only

Front µP

TMP87CH74F

RSA1 RSA2

STBY

Audio

ASC1M for EUROPE only

ION

(HEF IC'S)

AKILL

Follow Me

Power

Supply

Display

TR 01019_001 130502

Page 79

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

: ,

Wiring Diagram

IOE

(1005)

DVDR 80 EUROPE

DVDR 80 DVDR 75 APAC

DVDR 80

GNDA

DAINOPT

DAINCOAX

DAOUT

GNDD

GLINK_RXD GLINK_TXD

IR_OUT

EN 79DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6.

6 5

1921

2 1

N.C.

1920

2 1

GND

3 2

1923

8026 .... 3103 601 0043.

8001 .... 3103 601 0019.

8010 .... 3103 601 0028.

8011 .... 3103 601 0029.

1943

GND

1mm

VGNSTBY

TEMP_SENSE

N.C.

DAOUT

POR_DC

N.C.

65432

INT

GND

12VSTBY

N.C.

D_IKILL

GND

D_PCMCLK

SDA

5VSTBY

GND

D_DATA0

1951

SCL

1112131415161718192021

D_WCLK

1mm

GNDD

1 2

FBIN

BE_FAN

N.C. D_RDY

1986

A_RDY

D_DATA

A_DATA

IRESET_DIG

GND

D_BCLK

789

65432

GND

A_DAT

A_PCMCLK

GND

1mm

A_BCLK

A_WCLK

1900

GND

8002 .... 3103 601 0020.

8004 .... 3103 601 0022.

GND

1mm

65432

1946

GND

GNDUGND

8007 .... 3103 601 0025.

1933

3V35VGND

GND

543

4V6

GND5NGND

JST-KR

321

1960

2mm

GND

DVAR

DVAL

For DV-IN

2mm

JST-KR

12V

8005 .... 3103 601 0023.

1944

1949

1mm

D_B

D_C

D_G

D_R

GND

F4716

F4718

F4720

F4722

1941

F4709

14151617181920

D_Y

GND

F4714

GND

D_CVBS

F4712

789

101112

A_C

GND

A_YCVBS

GND

AINFL

AINFR

A_G

GND

CVBSFIN

432

GND

N.C.

A_B

CFINI

1948

1947

A_R

GND

2mm

987654321

JST-KR

1942

GND

YFIN

1932

TUNER

3V3

SPLITTER

3V3

ANALOG BOARD

(1001)

9876543

121110

ION

12V

GND

2mm

JST-KR

8021 .... 3103 601 0038.

8013 .... 3103 601 0031.

8014 .... 3103 601 0020.

8016 .... 3103 601 0033.

8015 .... 3103 601 0032.

8006 .... 3103 601 0024.

1mm

1800

2mm

12V

GND

-5V

1402

GND

N.C.

GND

IISDATA1

GND

SYNC

GND

FLAG

GND

BCLK

GND

IISDATA0

GND

WCLK

GND

RXD

GND

TXD

CPR

AIRQ

SUR

GND

DLOAD

GND

N.C.

ARESETN

GND

1mm

BASIC ENGINE

(1007)

GND

4V6

GND

3V3

1901

8012 .... 3103 601 0040.

8020 .... 3103 601 0037.

1mm

GNDD

1mm

1603

AE_BCLK

AE_WCLK

654

N.C.

GNDD

AE_DATA1

DAINOPT

DAINCOAX

1718192021

GNDD

AE_ACLK

GNDD

DAOUT

GNDD

131415

GNDD

AD_BCLK

101112

AD_WCLK

AD_DATA0

GNDD

AD_ACLK

1201

65432

MUTEN

** +3V3

GNDD

N.C.

** +5V

AD_SPDIF33

1200

LEDLED+

8019 .... 3103 601 0036.

65432

GNDD

DAC-B

1602

GNDD

(1003)

GNDD

DAC-C

DVIO

GNDD

DAC-A/Y

1600

1mm

IRESET_DIG

VSM_UAR T1_RX

501 1

VSM_UAR T1_TX

VOR

65432

T1_RTSn

T1_CTSn

VSM_UAR

GND

ION

VOL

BE_FAN

ANA_WE

VIP_FB

GNDD

1mm

192021

Y_IN

C_IN

U_IN

V_IN

GNDD

1101

8003 .... 3103 601 0021.

789

65432

11121314151617

GNDD

Y_OUT_B

CVBS_OUT_B

(1002)

GNDD

C_OUT_B

BCLK_CTL_SERVICE

IISDATA1

IISDATA0

GNDD

CVBS_Y_IN

DIGITAL BOARD

8018 .... 3103 601 0035.

GNDD

R_OUT_B

GND GND

N.C.

GND

SYNC

GND

FLAG

GND

BCLK

GND

WCLK

GNDD

G_OUT_B

1101

B_OUT_B

10 9

5 4

3 2

ARESETN

1601

CTS1P GNDD RTS1P

RX1P

TX1P

GNDD

GNDD GNDD

N.C.

GNDD

+3V3 +3V3 +3V3 +3V3

1mm

AIRQ

DLOAD

GNDD

G_OUT_B

171819

GNDD

R_OUT_B

GNDD

C_OUT_B

1mm

1953

GND

GNDD

Y_OUT_B

65432

GNDUGND

10111213141516

GNDD

CVBS_Y_IN

CVBS_OUT_B

GNDD

GND

789

65432

C_IN

GNDD

1951

V_IN

Y_IN

U_IN

GNDD

1mm

432

1970

1941

1940

1mm

GND

GLINK_RXD_CHAS

D_B

D_G

GND

789

POR_DC

12VSTBY

VGNSTBY

TEMP_SENSE

1mm

POR_DC

VGNSTBY

TEMP_SENSE

IR_OUT_CHAS

GLINK_TXD_CHAS

D_C

D_R

D_Y

GND

65432

INT

GND

SDA

GND

5VSTBY

789

65432

INT

GND

5VSTBY

12VSTBY

13141516171819

101112

GND

D_CVBS

A_YCVBS

SCL

SDA

SERVICE

+5V

JST-KR

2mm

1901

-5V

8008 .... 3103 601 0006.

ION

+5V

JST-KR

2mm

1900

1100

1mm

GND

RXD

GND

TXD

CPR

SUR

GND

N.C.

3 2

GND

1950

789

65432

A_C

GND

1mm

432

GND

GNDUGND

GND

1mm

1952

A_G

A_B

GND

A_R

GND

B_OUT_B

EPG

(1006)

8017 .... 3103 601 0034.

8009 .... 3103 601 0027.

8022 .... 3103 601 0016.

2mm

8023 .... 3103 601 0017.

321

1940

+12VSTBY

TRAY_LED1

TRAY_LED2

+12VSTBY

Traylight left

JST DA

1941

JST DA

2mm

8024 .... 3103 601 0018.

JST DA

1950

+12VSTBY

TRAY_LED2

Traylight right

2mm

342

2mm

1911

JST DA

TRAY_LED

GND

+12VSTBY

CONTROL-PANEL

3UH000

1922

AFCRI_FC

GND_FC

AFCLI_FC

CVBSFIN_FC

GND_FC

342

2mm

1930

JST DA

GND

TRAY_LED

1931

+12VSTBY

TRAY_LED1

+12VSTBY

TRAY_LED2

JST DA

2mm

2000-03-10

KEYPRINT

8SW_FC

CFIN_FC

678954321

YFIN_FC

GND_FC

1910

JST-KR

1mm

543

5VSTBY

INT

GND

POR_DC

12VSTBY

VGNSTBY

TEMP_SENSE

SDA

SCL

2mm

FFC-Cable

Cable Tree assy

FFC-Cable only for DVDR 70/75

A_YCVBS F4709

DC, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

D_CVBS F4712

A: DC

, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

D_Y F4714

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

D_C F4716

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

D_R F4718 D_G F4720

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

D_B F4722

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

130 210

DV IN

TR 06005_002

110303

1101

Page 80

Waveforms

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

Waveforms Display Board

EN 80DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6.

Waveforms Analog Board

7106/7108-Emitter

A: DC, 2 V/Div, 10us/Div

I324 VSource (Standby)

A: DC, 50mV/Div 5us/Div

A_CVBS I405

IC7103-19

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 10us/Div

I324 VSource (no disc loaded)

A: DC, 50mV/Div 2us/Div

D_CVBS F4712

IC7103-8

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 100ns/Div

F723 VFV I723

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

D_Y F4714

F327 VDrain (Standby)

A: DC, 100V/Div 5us/Div

E465

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

D_C F4716

F327 VDrain (no disc loaded)

A: DC, 100V/Div 2us/Div

E461

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

D_R F4718

I324 VGate (Standby)

A: DC, 1V/Div 5us/Div

E462

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

D_G F4720

I324 VGate (no disc loaded)

A: DC, 2V/Div 2us/Div

E463

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

D_B F4722

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

I502/I504

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

A_CVBS F8008

A: DC, 500mV/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

I517/I518

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

I818

A: DC, 1 V/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

F501/F502

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

I994

A: DC, 1 V/Div

20ns/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

I014/I032

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

I989

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

ARDAC/ALDAC F010/F011

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

I623

A: DC, 1 V/Div 500us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

SYNC F843

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

TR 070018_001

200303

Page 81

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

EN 81DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6.

Waveforms Digital Board

Sysclk_VSM

2V / div DC 20ns / div

27M_clk_PS

Sysclk_5505

2V / div DC 20ns / div

acc_aclk_pll

Waveforms Digital Board

AD_WCLK; AE_WCLK

2V / div AC 10us / div 2V / div AC 200ns / div

AD_DATAO; AE_DATAO; AE_DATAIAD_DATAO; AE_DATAO; AE_DATAI

2V / div AC 5us / div

AD_BCLK; AE_BCLK

AD_SPDIF

2V / div AC 250ns / div

AD_ACLK

2V / div AC 50ns / div

I401 VIP_VS

2V / div DC 5ms / div

2V / div DC 20ns / div

EMI_PROCCLK

2V / div DC 10ns / div

VIP_ICLK

2V / div DC 50ns / div

DSP_clk

2V / div DC 10ms / div

VSM_M_CLK

R_OUT

200mV / div AC 20us / div

CVBS_OUT

200mV / div AC 20us / div

G_OUT

200mV / div AC 20us / div

Y_OUT

200mV / div AC 20us / div

B_OUT

200mV / div AC 20us / div

C_OUT

200mV / div AC 20us / div

2V / div DC 20ns / div

CL 16532145_053.eps

031201

VSYNC

2V / div DC 20ms / div

HSYNC

2V / div DC 20ms / div

CL 16532145_054.eps

031201

Page 82

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

EN 82DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6.

DAC-B

500mV / div AC 10us / div

DAC-C

500mV / div AC 10us / div

Waveforms Digital Board

DAC-A/Y

500mV / div AC 10us / div

HS_IN

2V / div DC 20us / div

Cr-signal

500mV / div AC 10us / div

VSOUT

2V / div DC 10ms / div

Waveforms DVIO

F410

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 20ns/Div A: DC, 1 V/Div, 20us/Div

F800

DC, 500mV/Div , 50ns/Div

F529

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 20ns/Div

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 500ns/Div

F411

F801

F551

F400/F401

F527

A: DC, 2V/Div, 20ns/Div

F552

FRAME_IN

2V / div DC 10ms / div

Y-signal

500mV / div AC 10us / div

Y_OUT; Cr_OUT; Cb_OUT

VS_IN

2V / div DC 10ms / div

Cb-signal

500mV / div AC 10us / div

YUV_IN

2V / div DC 10ms / div

HSOUT

2V / div DC 10us / div

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 20ns/Div

F536

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 5us/Div

F609

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 200ns/Div

F603

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 20ns/Div

F620

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 5us/Div

F610

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 20ns/Div

2V / div DC 20us /div

CL 16532145_055.eps

031201

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 200Us/Div

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 10ns/Div

TR 06055_001

110203

Page 83

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

Test points overview Analog Board

EN 83DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6.

F0001 A10 F0002 C10 F0003 C10 F0005 C10 F0007 C10 F0009 C10 F0010 C9 F0011 C10 F0012 C10 F0014 C10 F0016 C10 F0021 A10 F006 C9 F007 C8 F008 C9 F009 C9 F010 A10 F011 B10 F300 A3

F301 A3 F302 A4 F304 B1 F305 B2 F306 A1 F307 B1 F308 A2 F309 A2 F310 A2 F311 A2 F312 B1 F313 A1 F314 A1 F315 C1 F316 C2 F317 C4 F318 C2 F319 C2 F320 C1

F321 C3 F322 C4 F323 B1 F324 B3 F325 A9 F326 B2 F328 B1 F329 B1 F331 A3 F333 A3 F334 A2 F335 A2 F336 A2 F337 A2 F338 B1 F339 B1 F340 A2 F341 B3 F342 C1

F343 A2 F344 C9 F346 A2 F347 C8 F348 C8 F349 C3 F350 C3 F351 A3 F352 C8 F353 C8 F354 A2 F355 C3 F356 C3 F357 C3 F358 C6 F359 C8 F360 C3 F361 C2 F362 A2

F363 A2 F364 A3 F366 B2 F367 B2 F368 B2 F369 B2 F371 A3 F372 A3 F373 B3 F374 B3 F381 C8 F382 C9 F383 C8 F384 C8 F401 A9 F4102 A9 F4103 A9 F412 A8 F4203 C5

F4205 C6 F4207 C6 F4209 C6 F4210 B5 F4505 A9 F4707 A6 F4712 B6 F4714 B6 F4716 B6 F4718 B6 F4720 B6 F4721 A6 F4722 B6 F485 A6 F499 A4 F501 A7 F502 A7 F504 A3 F5101 A5

F5102 A5 F5103 A5 F5106 A5 F5108 A5 F5110 A5 F5113 A4 F5116 A5 F5119 A4 F5120 A4 F5201 A5 F5202 A5 F5203 A5 F5206 A5 F5207 A5 F5208 A5 F5210 A5 F5211 A5 F5213 A4 F5215 A5

F5216 C8 F5219 A4 F5220 A4 F6001 C6 F6002 C10 F6004 C6 F701 A3 F702 B4 F703 A3 F704 A3 F707 A3 F708 B5 F709 B4 F710 B3 F713 C7 F913 B5 F950 C9 I001 C10 I002 B10

I004 C10 I005 B10 I006 B9 I007 B10 I008 B9 I009 B9 I013 B9 I014 B10 I015 B9 I018 B10 I019 B10 I020 A9 I021 B9 I022 C9 I023 B10 I029 C10 I030 B9 I031 C10 I032 B10

I036 A9 I300 A1 I301 A3 I303 B2 I304 B3 I305 B3 I306 A1 I307 C1 I308 B2 I309 B3 I310 C2 I311 B1 I312 B1 I313 B3 I314 A1 I315 B3 I316 A1 I317 A1 I318 C3

I319 C3 I320 C3 I321 B1 I322 B1 I323 A3 I324 B1 I325 B1 I326 A2 I327 B2 I329 A2 I330 C1 I331 C1 I332 B2 I333 A3 I334 A2 I335 C1 I336 B2 I337 A3 I338 A3

I339 A2 I340 C1 I341 A5 I342 A2 I343 C1 I344 C2 I345 A2 I346 A3 I347 B7 I348 C1 I349 B7 I350 C2 I351 C2 I352 B7 I353 A3 I354 A3 I355 C2 I356 A2 I357 A2

I361 A2 I402 A6 I405 A10 I406 A4 I407 A4 I408 A4 I409 A4 I411 B6 I412 B6 I413 C5 I414 A5 I415 C6 I416 B5 I417 B5 I418 C4 I419 C9 I420 C9 I424 A4 I428 A7

I429 A9 I431 A7 I433 A7 I434 A7 I437 A6 I438 B6 I439 A6 I440 A6 I441 A6 I442 B7 I443 A7 I444 A6 I445 A6 I446 B6 I447 B6 I448 A7 I449 A6 I451 A6 I453 A9

I454 A9 I456 B6 I457 B5 I458 A5 I459 A5 I460 A5 I461 A4 I462 A4 I463 A4 I464 A4 I465 A4 I466 B5 I467 A6 I468 B6 I469 B5 I470 B5 I476 A5 I478 B6 I479 B5

I481 B6 I482 B6 I483 B5 I484 A5 I485 A7 I486 A6 I487 A9 I488 A9 I489 A9 I490 A10 I491 A10 I492 A9 I493 A9 I501 A8 I502 B8 I503 A8 I504 B8 I505 C5 I506 B5

I507 A9 I508 A7 I509 A8 I510 A8 I511 A8 I513 B7 I514 C6 I515 B7 I516 B7 I517 B8 I518 B8 I519 A8 I520 A8 I521 A4 I523 A7 I524 A7 I525 B9 I526 B9 I527 B6

I611 B7 I612 B7 I613 C7 I614 B7 I615 B7 I616 B7 I617 B7 I620 B6 I621 B6 I623 B6 I624 B7 I625 B7 I630 C6 I631 C6 I701 A3 I702 B4 I703 B4 I704 B4 I706 B3

I528 B7 I529 A8 I530 A8 I531 A8 I532 A7 I533 A8 I534 A7 I535 A7 I539 A8 I540 A8 I601 B6 I602 C8 I603 B6 I604 B6 I605 B7 I607 B4 I608 C7 I609 B6 I610 B7

I707 B4 I708 B4 I709 B4 I711 C4 I712 B4 I713 C4 I715 A9 I716 A10 I717 B4 I721 C4 I723 C7 I724 C5 I725 C5 I726 B4 I727 B4 I728 B4 I729 B4 I730 B4 I731 C4

I732 A3 I733 A3 I734 A3 I735 A3 I739 B4 I741 B3 I742 B3 I743 B4 I744 B4 I745 B4 I746 B4 I748 B4 I749 C4 I751 C5 I754 C4 I951 C9 I952 B9 I954 B9 I955 B9

I956 B9 I957 B9 I958 B9 I959 B9 I987 A10 I988 A10 I989 A10 I990 A10 I991 A10 I992 A10 I993 A10 I994 A10 I995 A10 I996 A9 I997 A10 I998 A10 I999 A10

D_R F4718

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

ARDAC/ALDAC F010/F011

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

A_CVBS I405

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

I502/I504

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

A_CVBS F8008

D_G F4720

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

I623

A: DC, 1 V/Div 500us/Div

D_CVBS F4712

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

I517/I518

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

I818

D_B F4722

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

SYNC F843

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

D_Y F4714

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

F501/F502

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

I994

F327 VDrain (Standby)

A: DC, 100V/Div 5us/Div

F327 VDrain (no disc loaded)

: DC, 1

s/D

I324 VGate (Standby)

A: DC, 1V/Div 5us/Div

I324 VGate (no disc loaded)

A: DC, 2V/Div 2us/Div

I324 VSource (Standby)

A: DC, 50mV/Div 5us/Div

I324 VSource (no disc loaded)

A: DC, 50mV/Div 2us/Div

F723 VFV I723

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

E465

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

E461

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

E462

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

TR 07002_001

200303

E463

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

D_C F4716

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

A: DC, 1 V/Div 20us/Div

I014/I032

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

A: DC, 1 V/Div

20ns/Div

I989

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

Page 84

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

Test points overview UP Sub Board

EN 84DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6.

F8001 C3 F8002 C3 F8003 C3 F8004 C3 F8005 C3 F8006 C3 F8007 C2 F8008 C2 F801 A3 F802 A2 F803 A1 F804 B3 F805 B3 F807 B3 F812 C2 F813 C2 F814 C2 F815 C2 F816 C2 F817 C1 F818 C1 F819 A3 F820 B3 F821 A3 F822 B3 F823 A3 F824 B3 F825 A3 F826 A3 F827 A2 F828 A2 F829 A2 F830 A2

F831 C1 F832 A2 F833 C1 F834 A1 F835 C1 F836 C1 F837 A2 F838 A2 F839 C2 F840 A2 F8401 A2 F8402 A2 F8403 A2 F8406 A2 F8407 A1 F841 C2 F842 C2 F843 B1 F844 A2 F845 A2 F846 A1 F847 B1 F848 A3 F849 A3 F850 B3 F851 B3 F852 C2 F8603 C1 F8604 A3 F8606 C3 F8607 C3 F8608 C3

F8609 C3

F8610 C3 F8701 A1 F8702 A3 F8703 A3 F8704 A3 F8705 A3 F8706 A3 F8707 A3 F8708 A3 F8802 C2 F8803 C2 F8804 C2 F8805 C2 F8806 C2 F8807 C2 F8808 C1 F901 A1 F902 A3 F903 A1 F904 A1 F905 A2 F906 A1 F907 B1 F908 A1 F909 B1 F910 B1 I801 C2 I802 C3 I803 C2 I804 B2 I805 A3 I806 A3

I807 A3

I808 A3 I809 C1 I810 B3 I811 A3 I812 A2 I813 A1 I814 B3 I815 A3 I816 A1 I817 C1 I818 B1 I819 C1 I820 C1 I821 B3 I822 B3 I823 A2 I824 A2 I825 C2 I903 B1 I904 B1 I905 B1 I906 B1 I907 C1 I908 B1

TR 06058_001

250203

Page 85

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

Test points overview DIVIO Board

EN 85DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6.

Page 86

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

Test points overview Digital Board

EN 86DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6.

+3V3

Resetn_BE

Resetn

+3V3+3V3

+12V +5V

+3V3

Resetn_VE

-5V

+3V3

Sysclk_Empress EMI_PROCCLK

Sysclk_ProgScan

AE_DATAO

VSYNC HSYNC

+3V3 +3V3

ACC_ACLK_OSC Sysclk_VSM_5508

+3V3

VE_DSn VE_DTACKn

ACC_ACLK_PLL

+3V3

Mute

VIP_ICLK

+3V3

VSOUT

HSOUT

DAC-A/Y

DAC-B

DAC-C

YCb

+5V

Reset_DVIO

+5V

+3V3

CL 16532145_034.eps

101201

Page 87

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

Layout Digital Board (Mapping Testlands )

F214 A3 F247 A2 F248 A2 F249 A2 F250 A2 F264 A2 F265 A3 F931 A4 F932 A4 F933 A5 F934 A4 F935 A4 I100 A4 I101 C5 I102 C5 I103 B4 I104 B4 I105 B3 I106 B3 I107 B3 I108 B3 I109 B4 I110 B3 I111 A2 I112 B5 I113 B5 I114 B5 I115 B5 I116 C3 I117 C3 I118 C4 I119 C4 I120 A4 I121 A3 I122 B3 I123 A2 I124 B4 I125 A2 I126 A3 I127 A2 I128 A4 I129 A2 I130 B3 I131 A3 I132 B1 I133 A3 I134 A3 I136 A3 I137 A2 I138 A3 I140 A3 I141 A4 I142 A3 I143 B4 I145 A3 I147 B4 I149 B3 I152 B3 I153 B5 I154 B3 I155 B3 I156 A3 I157 A3 I158 B4 I159 A5 I160 B3 I161 B3 I162 C4 I163 A3 I164 B4 I165 A3 I166 B4 I167 A3 I168 C5 I169 A3 I170 A3 I171 A3 I172 A3 I173 A3 I174 A3

I175 A3 I176 A3 I177 A3 I178 A3 I179 A3 I180 A3 I181 A3 I182 B3 I183 A2 I184 A3 I186 A3 I187 A3 I188 A3 I200 A2 I201 B3 I202 A5 I203 A3 I204 C3 I205 A2 I206 A4 I207 A2 I208 B3 I209 B4 I210 A2 I211 A2 I212 A2 I213 A2 I215 B5 I216 A1 I217 A2 I218 A2 I219 A1 I220 A1 I221 B2 I222 B2 I223 A2 I224 A1 I225 A2 I226 A2 I227 A2 I228 A2 I229 B5 I230 A2 I231 A2 I232 A2 I233 A2 I234 A4 I235 A4 I236 B4 I237 A2 I238 A2 I239 B5 I240 A4 I241 B2 I242 B1 I243 B1 I244 A2 I245 A1 I246 A2 I251 A1 I252 A2 I253 A2 I254 A1 I255 A1 I256 A2 I257 C5 I258 A2 I259 A2 I260 A1 I261 A1 I262 A1 I263 A1 I264 A2 I265 B5 I266 A2 I267 A2 I268 B2 I269 B2 I270 A2 I271 B1

I300 A2 I301 A2 I302 A2 I303 B2 I304 B3 I305 B3 I306 A3 I307 B3 I308 A3 I309 B3 I400 A4 I401 A4 I402 B4 I403 A4 I404 B4 I405 B4 I406 B4 I407 A4 I408 A5 I409 A4 I410 A4 I412 B4 I413 A4 I414 B4 I415 B4 I416 B4 I500 C5 I501 C5 I502 C5 I503 C5 I504 C5 I505 C5 I506 C5 I507 C5 I508 C5 I509 C5 I510 B5 I511 C4 I512 C5 I513 B5 I514 B4 I515 C5 I516 C5 I517 C5 I518 C4 I519 C5 I520 C4 I521 C4 I522 C4 I523 C4 I524 C4 I525 C5 I526 C5 I527 C5 I528 C4 I529 C5 I530 C5 I531 C5 I532 C5 I533 C4 I535 C5 I536 C4 I537 C5 I538 C4 I540 C5 I543 C5 I551 C5 I552 C4 I553 C4 I555 C4 I600 A5 I601 A5 I602 A5 I603 C5 I604 A5 I605 A5 I606 A5 I607 A5 I608 A5 I609 B5

I610 A5 I611 B5 I612 A5 I613 B5 I614 A5 I615 B5 I616 A5 I617 A5 I618 C4 I619 A5 I621 A1 I622 A1 I623 A1 I624 A1 I625 A1 I626 A1 I627 B4 I628 C4 I629 A5 I630 C4 I631 C4 I632 C4 I633 B4 I634 C4 I635 C5 I636 C4 I637 C5 I638 C5 I639 C5 I640 C5 I641 B5 I642 A5 I643 A5 I644 A5 I645 B5 I646 C4 I647 A5 I649 C5 I650 B4 I651 B5 I652 B5 I653 B5 I654 B4 I655 B4 I656 B5 I657 C4 I658 C4 I659 C3 I660 B5 I661 B5 I662 C5 I663 B4 I664 B5 I665 C4 I666 C5 I667 B5 I668 B4 I669 B4 I670 A5 I671 B5 I700 B2 I701 B1 I702 B1 I703 C2 I704 C2 I705 C2 I706 C2 I707 C2 I708 C2 I709 C1 I710 B3 I711 C2 I712 C2 I713 A1 I714 C2 I715 C2 I716 B3 I717 B3 I718 B3 I719 B3

I720 B3 I721 B2 I722 B3 I723 B2 I724 B2 I725 B3 I726 B2 I727 B2 I728 A1 I729 A1 I730 A1 I731 A1 I732 B2 I733 B2 I734 B1 I735 B1 I800 C4 I801 C3 I802 C3 I803 C3 I805 C3 I806 C3 I807 C3 I808 C2 I809 C2 I810 C3 I811 C3 I812 C2 I813 C2 I814 C1 I815 B2 I816 B2 I817 B2 I818 C2 I819 C3 I820 C3 I821 C3 I822 C3 I823 C3 I824 B2 I825 B2 I826 C3 I827 C3 I828 C3 I829 C3 I830 C3 I831 C3 I832 C3 I833 C3 I834 B3 I835 B3 I836 B2 I837 C3 I838 C3 I839 C3 I840 C3 I841 C3 I842 C3 I843 C2 I844 C2 I845 C2 I846 B3 I847 B2 I848 B2 I849 B2 I850 B2 I851 B1 I852 B1 I868 C2 I869 C2 I870 B2 I871 C3 I872 C3 I873 B2 I874 C2 I875 C2 I876 C3 I877 C2 I878 C3 I879 C3

CL 16532145-34m.eps

EN 87DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6.

I880 C3 I881 C3 I882 C3 I883 C2 I884 C2 I900 B4 I901 B4 I902 B4 I903 B4 I904 B2 I905 A4 I906 A4 I907 A4 I908 A5 I909 B4 I911 B3 I912 A3 I913 B3 I915 B3 I916 B3 I917 B3 I918 A5 I919 B3 I920 B3 I921 A5 I922 A5 I923 B3 I924 A4 I925 B3 I926 A5 I927 A5 I928 A5 I930 B3 I931 A5 I932 B2 I933 B3

101201

Page 88

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

7. Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Display Panel

EN 88DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

not used

735187

0211

HOLDER EPG

3134

GND

TEMP_SENSE

from/to Analogboard

or EPG Board for sets with Guide Plus

to STBY-PRINT

-T

10K

2322640

1910

VGNSTBY

POR_DC 12VSTBY

GND GND

5VSTBY

SDA

SCL

FMN

1911

GND

Tray_Led

+12VSTBY

0210

LIGHT CHAMBER RECORD

EPG

1 2 3 4

F1405

5 6 7 8 9

GND

F1401

F1501

F1502

F1503

F1504

1111

GND

F1404

F1407

BC847BW

F1402

+12VSTBY

6107

I189

3136

I191

3138

I193

9.4V

7110

GND

5101

BLM18H

GND

LW-3333-T2-5

180R

BLM18H

INTINT

Tray_Led

+12VSTBY

F103

0.1V

5103

3109

I181

1164

GND

RECORD

7105

BC847BW

4102

not used

3146

22K

F104

F1408

F1409

F1410

2K2

LEFT

EVQ11L05R

+12VSTBY

6101

I182

6102

I183

6103

I190

3137

I192

3139

GND

VGNSTBY

F1403

3131

I180

1163

LTL-1MHHR

7106/7108-Emitter

LTL-1MHHR

A: DC, 2 V/Div, 10us/Div

LTL-1MHHR

IC7103-8

270R

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 100ns/Div

270R

I194

7.5V

0.1V

6112

BAS316

for CSTEP only

2105

not used

GND

+12VSTBY

1K0

3130

for CSTEP only

I168

1166

CH-

EVQ11L05R

GND

3141 47K

+5VSTBY

3145

3111

22K

+5VSTBY

F102

3115

100R

10K

EVQ11L05R

10K

1168

3110

I167

GND

PDTA124EU

GND

3114

100R

220R

EVQ11L05R

7104 BC847BW

0005

IC7103-19

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 10us/Div

+5VSTBY

7112

0.1V

6111

BAS316

I173

I174

47K

3108

I166

1170

EVQ11L05R

OPEN/CLOSE

GNDGND

PROTECTION FOIL

Tray_Led

3143

+5VSTBY

10K

3144

I184

3154

10K

not used

7100

BJ900GNK

for CSTEP only

3135

I185

1162

GND

not used

VGNSTBY

I157

VKK

4K7

for CSTEP only

EVQ11L05R

RIGHT

I177

6110

BAS316

9101

2115

GND

FIL1

+5VSTBY

BZX384-C6V8

50V

47n

1165

3142

2117

GND

6100

3106

I179

GND

P27

P26

P25

P26P37P48P59P610P711P812P9

10K

3113

INT

1K0

FIL2

FIL1

22u

3123

470R

3119

470R

I158

10K

3122

GND

47K

3103

220R

I172

1167

REC

EVQ11L05R

P24

P23

P22

P21

I156

47n

10u

2110

2111

BC337-25

GND

2113

5104

100u

680n

BC327-25

10K

3104

I171

1169

STOP

PLAY

EVQ11L05R

GNDGND GND

P6P7P8

7107

TSOP4836ZC1

OUT

GND

2K2

10n

3126

100R

8M0

1110

+5VSTBY

3117

2112

GND

4.8V

GND

P10

I150

EFOMC

I151

10K

+5VSTBY

3121

2116

GND

P11

220n

I165

GND GND

220R

I143

22u

P12

+5VSTBY

P16

I161

5.4V

6109

3129

I169

1161

P15

3125

470R

1K0

EVQ11L05R

P1P2P3P4P5

P14

I147

3118

330R

7109

BC847BW

I162

GND

+5VSTBY

10K

3140

for CSTEP only

CH+

23 24 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41

P1721P18

2109

22p

not used

GND

2108

22p

not used

IPOR

0.4V

3120 1K0

2114

I163

1n0

10K

3124

GND

+5VSTBY

2K2

3102

3107

10n

2100

2103

GND

P18

P17

P20

P19

13 25G226G327G428G529G630G731G832G933

P1014P1115P1216P1317P1418P1519P16

+12VSTBY

3116

330R

7106

I160

5.4V

I159

7108

GND

for CSTEP only

BAS316

2K2

3105

I170

1160

EPG

EVQ11L05R

GND

3132

3133

P13

GND

I155

1K0

3112

I144

1.9V

2.1V

1K0

I137

1K0

not used

I142

4.8V

G2G3G4G5G6

2101

2102

47n

22u

16V

XTAL

RESET

TEST SCK1

79 80

SI1

SO1

2 3 4 5 6

P0<0:7>

INT0

INT1

TC2 PPG

DVO TC4

PDO PWM

INT3 TC1

INT2

INT4 TC3

P1<0:7>

INT5 STOP

XTIN

XTOUT

P2<0:2>

SCL SI0

SDA SO0

SCK0

P3<0:2>

AIN

P4<0:7>

P5<0:3>

+5VSTBY

AIN

5100

VAREF

10u

5.1V

7103

TMP87CH74F

G7G1G9

VSS

VASS

GND

0206

40 78

VDD

PD<0:4>

P6<0:7>

P7<0:7>

P8<0:7>

P9<0:7>

DISPLAY HOLDER

VKK

-26.5V

VKK

GND

2 3 4

5 6

0 1 2 3

4 5 6 7

9 10 11

12 13 14 15

16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23

24 25 26 27

28 29 30 31

2104

0005 A4 0206 C11 0210 I1 0211 C1 1110 D9 1111 A1

FIL2

I178

6105

BAS316

3127

100K

VKK

6106

BAS316

3128

100K

VKK

100n

+5VSTBY

-23.9V

7101

BC847BW

I176

-24V

100p

3100

VKK

4100

not used

22K

2123

+5VSTBY

-23.9V

7102

BC847BW

I175

-24V

100p

3101

VKK

4101

not used

22K

50V

2124

G8_9

I104

I103

I102

I101

I100

I136

I135

I134

I133

I132

I131

I130

I129

I128 I127

50 51

I126 I125

I124

I123

I122

I121

I120

I119

I118

I117

60 61

I116 I115

62 63

I114 I113

I112

I111

I110

I109

I108

I107

I106

I105

P23 P24 P25 P26 P27

V0 V2

G8_9

G2 G1

G1 P13 P12

P9 P11 P10

P1 P14

P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22

2118

100p

2119

100p

2120

100p

2121

100p

2122

100p

2125

100p

2126

100p

3147

3148

3149

3150

3151

3152

3153

VKK

22K

TR 06019_002

110203

1160 I7 1161 I8 1162 I5 1163 I3 1164 I2 1165 I6 1166 I3 1167 I6

1168 I4 1169 I6 1170 I4 1910 G1 1911 H1 2100 I8 2101 D10 2102 D10 2103 I9 2104 D11 2105 G3

2108 D9 2109 C9 2110 E6 2111 E7 2112 E9 2113 F7 2114 F9 2115 F5 2116 G9 2117 F6 2118 E13 2119 F13

2120 F13 2121 F13 2122 F13 2123 C13 2124 D13 2125 G13 2126 G13 3100 C13 3101 D13 3102 H8 3103 I6 3104 I7

3105 I7 3106 I6 3107 H9 3108 I4 3109 I2 3110 I4 3111 F3 3112 G10 3113 E6 3114 G4 3115 G3

3116 E7 3117 E9 3118 E8 3119 F6 3120 F9 3121 F9 3122 F6 3123 F6 3124 F8 3125 E8 3126 E9 3127 C14

3128 D14 3129 I8 3130 I3 3131 I3 3132 H10 3133 H10 3134 F1 3135 I5 3136 D2 3137 B3 3138 E2 3139 C3

3140 G8 3141 C3 3142 D6 3143 C5 3144 E4 3145 E3 3146 E2 3147 E14 3148 F14 3149 F14 3150 F14

3151 G14 3152 G14 3153 G14 3154 H5 4100 B13 4101 D13 4102 D2 5100 D11 5101 F2 5103 G2 5104 F7 6100 F6

6101 A3 6102 B3 6103 B3 6105 B14 6106 C14 6107 C2 6109 G8 6110 D5 6111 E4 6112 E3

7100 A5 7101 B13 7102 D13 7103 E11 7104 F4 7105 C3 7106 E7 7107 F9 7108 F7 7109 E8 7110 E2 7112 C4 9101 F5 F102 G3 F103 F2 F104 G3 F1401 F1 F1402 F2 F1403 F3 F1404 G2 F1405 G1 F1407 G2 F1408 G3 F1409 G2 F1410 G3 F1501 H1 F1502 H1 F1503 H1 F1504 H1 I100 E12 I101 E12 I102 E12 I103 E12 I104 E12 I105 I12 I106 H12 I107 H12 I108 H12 I109 H12 I110 H12 I111 H12 I112 H12 I113 H12 I114 H12 I115 H12 I116 H12 I117 G12 I118 G12 I119 G12 I120 G12 I121 G12 I122 G12 I123 G12 I124 G12 I125 G12 I126 G12 I127 G12 I128 F12 I129 F12 I130 F12 I131 F12 I132 F12 I133 F12 I134 F12 I135 F12 I136 F12 I137 H10 I142 F10 I143 F10 I144 F10 I147 E8 I150 D9 I151 D9 I155 E10 I156 D7 I157 F5 I158 F6 I159 F7 I160 E8 I161 E8 I162 F8 I163 F8 I165 F10 I166 I4 I167 I4 I168 I3 I169 I8 I170 I7 I171 I7 I172 I6 I173 G4 I174 G4 I175 D13 I176 B13 I177 A5 I178 A12 I179 I6 I180 I3 I181 I2 I182 A3 I183 B3 I184 E4 I185 I5 I189 D2 I190 B3 I191 D2 I192 C3 I193 E2 I194 C3

12345

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Page 89

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Front Connector (FC)

EN 89DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7.

CVBS

AL/MONO

JPJ1127

S-CONN

1921

YKF51

CINCH

1920

F1006

F1003

F1001

GND_FC

F1002

GND_FC

I201

3205

3206

3207

not used

GND_FC

75R

3208

GND_FC

3209

not used

SIOV-CN0805M4CCG3

6200

6.8V

GND_FC

6201

DF3A6.8FU

6202

DF3A6.8FU

6203

DF3A6.8FU

6204

DF3A6.8FU

6.8V

3200

DF3A6.8FU

3202

GND_FC

1K0

564

2200

2201

GND_FC

330p

3204

68R

3201

GND_FCGND_FC

3203

GND_FC

1M0

2203

GND_FC

47p

not used

F1103

F1104

F1101

F1107

F1109

F1105

GND_FC

1922

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

S9B-PH

AFCRI_FC GND_FC AFCLI_FC CVBSFIN_FC

GND_FC NC

CFIN_FC

GND_FC

YFIN_FC

1920 B1 1921 E1 1922 C9 2200 A5 2201 C5 2202 E3 2203 C6 3200 A5 3201 A6 3202 B5 3203 C6

3204 C5 3205 C3 3206 D3 3207 E3 3208 A3 3209 C3 6200 A4 6201 B4 6202 C4 6203 D4 6204 E4 F1001 B2 F1002 B2 F1003 A2 F1006 A2 F1101 C8 F1103 C8 F1104 C8 F1105 C8 F1107 D8 F1109 D8 I201 E3

TO ANALOGBOARD

100n

2202

GND_FC

1234

TR 06020_001

030203

678

Page 90

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Layouts Display Panel

EN 90DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7.

Part 1

TR 06006a_001

Part 2

TR 06006b_001

TR 06006_001

300103

Page 91

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Layout Display Panel (Part 1 Bottom View)

EN 91DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7.

TR 06006a_001

240203

Page 92

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Layout Display Panel (Part 2 Bottom View)

EN 92DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7.

TR 06006b_001

240203

Page 93

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

EN 93DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7.

Standby Panel (STBY)

1130 C1 1930 A1

1931 A4

1234

1930

not used

Tray_Led

+12VSTBY

GND

from DC-BOARD

3301 A3 3302 A3

+12VSTBY

F3001

F3002

F3003

F3004

GND

3300

I300

3303 B3 3304 B3

4K7

3305 1K

3305 B2 7300 A2

7301 B2 F3001 B1

7300 PDTC124EU

GND

7301 PDTC124EU

GND

F3002 B1 F3003 B1

3301 270R

3303 270R

F3004 B1 F3101 A4

+12VSTBY

for CSTEP only

3302

270R

3304

270R

F3103 B4 I300 B13300 B1

F3101

F3103

not used

1931

Layout Standby Panel

TRAY_LED1

+12VSTBY

TRAY_LED2

to TRAY LEFT

1130

POWER

EVQ11L05R

GND

234

TR 07003_001

110303

TR 06007_001

030203

Page 94

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

EN 94DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7.

Tray Left Panel (TRL)

1940 A1 1941 B4

3400 A3 6400 A3 6401 A3

1234

Layout Tray Left Panel

6402 A2 F4001 A1 F4002 A1 F4003 B1

TRAY_LED1

+12VSTBY

TRAY_LED2

from STBY

1940

F4001

F4002

F4003

+12VSTBY

6402

LST670

3400

680R

6401 6400

LST670

+12VSTBY

LST670

for CSTEP only

123

+12VSTBY

1941

TRAY_LED2

+12VSTBY

TR 06021_001

to TRAY-RIGHT

030203

TR06008_001

030203

Page 95

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

EN 95DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7.

Tray Right Panel (TRR)

1950 A1 3500 A2 6500 A3 6501 A2 6502 A2

123

Layout Tray Right Panel

F5001 B1 F5002 B1

TRAY_LED2

+12VSTBY

not used

from TRAY-LEFT

+12VSTBY

1950

F5001

F5002

+12VSTBY

6502

LST670

3500

680R

6501

LST670

6500

LST670

for CSTEP only

123

TR 06022_001

030203

TR06009_001

030203

Page 96

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Analog Board: Frontend Video (FV)

EN 96DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7.

0005 A1 1701 C7 1702 E7 1703 D7

2719 B5

1704 F14 1705 C1

2720 B4

1706 F14

2721 B5

2713 A3

2722 B8

1 2

5SW

2723 B8 2724 B10 2725 D3 2727 C8

2728 C11 2729 C12 2730 C9 2731 C9

2732 F1 2733 F1 2734 D4 2735 G1

2736 G2 2737 E15 2740 F8 2741 F4

3456

5SW

0005

GND

BRACKET

5704

not used

3702

470R

3703

GND

150K

I701

1705

UV1316-MK3

PRE-FIL

SCLSW

SDASW

OUT

GND

33VSTBY

220R 3704

I715

I716

AGC

2732

GND

2u2

3727

3729

GAIN TRACK FILTER

NC16NC2

I733

2733

GND

I734

I735

2735

GND

100n

56p

CTRL

PRE-AMP

not used

33V

2736

GND

TRACK FILTER

MIX-OSC

IF AMP

SCL4SDA

VCC

F701

GND

56p

not used

AGC DET

PLL

IFOUT 11

ADC

F707

GND

2742 F8 3701 A7 3702 A2 3703 A3

2713

GND

I732

GND

PDTC124EU

22u

F710

2725

2.4V

3704 F1 3705 C14

3711 A4

2720

GND

9701

22p

for PAL-I only

7712

3711

5SW

GND

F704

3733

33K

100u

I741

4K7

3714 B11 3715 B12 3716 B5 3717 E12

5SW

5705

2734

2741

6u8

I731

3720 B9 3724 B8 3725 B12

4700

delete for MSTD

SFS_TS

I707 D7

I712 C9

5705 B43743 G8

3727 G1 3728 D13 3729 G1 3730 D5

3731 F13 3732 E15 3733 G4 3734 F15

3735 F14 3736 F15 3737 E6 3738 E6

3739 F10 3740 F9 3741 D14 3742 F6

3744 G8 3745 H5 3746 H6

3758 G6 4700 E4 4701 G5 5704 A2

3701

680R

for MSTD only

5SW

3716

6703

I742

BA591

F713

SB1

4K7

I703

3726

I704

BA591

6704

BA591

6705

4701

delete for MSTD

100R

3730

GND

I729

I730

2721 120p

2719 220p

4K7

3745

5K6

I702

PDTC124EU

GND

PDTC124EU

GND

5SW

2K2

3737

GND

3746

GND

40,4-ADJUST

7704

7705

5SW

3738

3742

GND

5SW

10K

3758

5.1V

7706 PDTC124EU

I739

0.1V

5K6

6K8

4K7

F709

57107KMY

GND

3 2 1

GND

OFWK3953M

I706

OFWK9656M

4.1V

7714 BC847BW

1701

F703

GND

1703

OFWG3956M

GND

1702

GND

3,3V

I707 I708

I743

I744

3.1V

for MSTD only

5709 B11 5710 B6 5711 C10

I745

3,3V 3,3V

3,2V 3,2V

7717 BC847BW

5713 D13 5714 G14 6703 C5 6704 E53726 C5

6705 F5 7701 A10 7702 D15 7704 C6

7705 D6 7706 H6 7710 C8 7711 F14

I717

3710

GND

AGC-ADJUST

low leakage

3720

I711

5,2V

I728

3,1V

2u2

3740

I721

I713

2730

I712

FPLL

680R

PSS

330R

220n

2,5V

INTERCARRIER MIXER

AM DEMODULATOR

2723

7710 TDA9817

1 2

23 24

5SW

2.5V

2,8V

I727

3724

470p

I709

TUNER

AMPLIFIER

SIF

AGC

2740

GND

3743

56K

22K

2727

0,7V

VIF

AGC AGC

VIF

SIF

INTERCARRIER

MODE SWITCH

2u2

2742

GND

3744

100K

GND

2722

100n

0,9V

AGC

7717 G7

F703 D7

F709 C6

7712 H4 7713 D12 7714 H6 7716 D14 I732 B3

9701 D4 F701 E23710 A9 F702 C11

F704 A4 F707 E3 F708 B11

F710 D3 F713 H5 I701 B2

I702 B6 I703 B5 I704 C5 I706 E6

I708 D7 I709 C8 I711 C9

10 11 12

3.5V

7701

5K6

PDTC124EU

GND

I746

2731

8p2

N750

I748

3,5V

2,7V

VCO

TWD

QSS MIXER

12 13

SIF1

AFC-ADJUST

7KMY 5711

2,7V

1 2

2724

GND

AFC

DETECTOR

VIDEO DEMODULATOR

AND AMPLIFIER

I726

5K6

3739

GND

SB1

SFS_TS

SB1

5SW

18K

3714

5709

100n

F702

171819

VOLTAGE

REFERENCE

FM-PLL DEMODULATOR

10 11

B/G

PSS

6u8

F708

3715 10K

10n

10u

2728

2729

GND

GND GND

202122

16 2V

L 0

I713 B9 I715 G1 I716 G1

L’ 0

3725

GND

I749

D/K

8K2

I717 A9 I721 G9 I723 F15 I724 E14

I725 F13 I726 E10 I727 E8 I728 E9

VFV I723

A: DC, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

for MSTD only

BC857BW 7713

1.9V

I751

4K7

3717

270R

I729 F5

I733 F1

I741 D4 I730 F5 I731 H4

I734 G1 I735 G1 I739 H6

I742 D5

I743 E7

I744 E7

I745 A8 I746 B9 I748 C9 I749 D12

13 14 15

5SW

3731

3728 100R

I725

I754

1.9V

7716

BC857BW

5713

15u

1.9V

1704

GND

1706

GND 5714

15u

3741

1I3

5MHZ5

TPSR

TPS

4K7

PDTC124EU

I724

7702

1.9V

3735

GND

* VERSION TABLE

PAL I (/07)

K3953M

TPS 6,0 MHz

330R

0R 0R

TDA9817

1703 1704 1706 3731 4700 4701 7710

PAL BG (/01)Pos.

G3956M

TPS 5,5 MHz

-270R 0R 0R

TDA9817

I751 D13 I754 D13

10K

3705

GND

5SW

3732

7711

BC857BW

2.5V

0.5V

3K3

3736

330R

GND

MULTISTD (/39)

G3956M

TPS 5,5 MHz

270R

TDA9818

0.2V

I723

GND

3734

2737

GND

2K7

TR 07004_001

47u

110303

AFC

SB1

VFV

345

7 8 9 10 11

12 13 14

Page 97

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Analog Board: In/Out Video (IOV)

VGNSTBY

5VSTBY

VGNSTBY

2402

GND

SDA

SCL

1943

SCL

SDA

5VSTBY

GND

INT

12VSTBY

IPOR_DC

VGNSTBY

TEMP_SENSE

FMN

from/to Display Board (1) /EPG Board (11)

TEMP_SENSE

CVBSFIN

from/to Front Connector (2)

AINFR

AINFL

VSA1 VSA2

ASC1S

FOME

SB1

AGC

PSS

SFS_TS

12VSTBY

1945-3

WSFI

YFIN

GND

CFIN

N.C.

GND

AINFL

GND

AINFR

ION

12VSTBY

4402

82K

3489

GND

1942

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

PH-B

F4209

ION

SFS_TS

from/to uP Board (2)

I465

I418

3429

47K

F4210

PSS

100n

BC857BW

3408

GND

2449

F4207

GND

3437

SB1

AGC

5SW

5VSTBY

7403

5/0V

3K9

5VSTBY

12VSTBY

VGNSTBY

2421 10u

F4203

68p

5VSTBY

10K

3438

WSFI

I419

WSFI

5VSTBY

BC857BW

7401

GND

10K

FOME

I461

12VSTBY

12VSTBY5VSTBY

4.5/5V

I406

22K

3405

GND

2407

not used

GND

1945-1

3481

GND

F4205

F401

4.7/4.5V

I407

SDA

2459

SCL

F402

SCL

5NSTBY

3406

GND

not used

SDA

BC847BW

2450 100n

220K

SCL

SCLSW

3458

4K7

8k2 for C-Step 8k2 for C-Step

7419

BSH111

I429

2412

not used

INT

from/to uP Board (2)

3454

5VSTBY

7402

5NSTBY

I411

0.8V

2428

10u

F4505

F499

3407

0/0.7V

I409

3K3

2464

GND

I408

0.7/0V

5NESD

10u

3447

YCVBSIN2

47K

F5120

3446

47K

3404

2401

100p

not used

GND

3433

3432

100R

GND

2.5V 0V

1.8V

1.2V

100R

2403

GND

47u

7411 NJM2285M

IN1B

CTL1

OUT1

GND2

OUT2

OUT3

CTL3 IN3A8IN3B

GND

I413

2404

100n

IN1A

GND1

IN2B

CTL2

IN2A

GND3

5SW

10u

5401

3490

2.5V

I412

1.7V

GND

V+

1.5V

11 10

I417

GND

1.6V

2408

I415

5VSTBY

-4.5V

3484

GND

A_YCVBS

3400 100K

not used

BC857BW

3418

GND

I453

7404

100K

2417 10u

not used

I428

3416

4K7

5NSTBY

AKILL

5VSTBY

3419

2406

GND

I416

5SW

3440

TEMP_SENSE

IPOR_DC

3483

not used

GND

3460

4K7

delete for C-Step

7420

10K

BSH111

A_YCVBS

PWONSW

A_YCVBS

SDASW

PWONSW

I462

I463

CVBSIN1

75R

150R

GND

5VSTBY

3459

3415

GND

22K

10n

IPFAIL

5NESD

P50

2410

5VSTBY

3482

10K

7421

BC847BW

1945-2

GND

6409

BZX384-C6V8

GND

6401

BZX384-C12

10K

3455

not used

10K

3451

I454

KILL

from/to uP Board (1)

EN 97DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7.

56789

GOUT

CVBSIN1

20A

21A

F5119

3414

F412

I424

ASC1M

A_CV BS I405

YCVBSOUT1

19A

6420

5NESD

6414

GND

75R

8SC2

18A

17A

F5110

BZX384-C12

F5116

BZX384-C6V8

3412

3445 150R

5VSTBY

3439

7412

PDTC124EU

P50

SDASW

SCLSW

SDASW

FBOUT

16A

I460

3409

75R

10K

GND

SCLSW

RCOUT

12A

14A

13A

15A

F5113

I459

I458

6402

6403

BZX384-C12

75R

5NESD

75R

3413

3410

2446

3955

10K

I420

1945-4

VFV

AFC

STBY

IASC1M

D_CV BS F 4712

P50

10A

11A

6404

BZX384-C12

F5106

5VSTBY

5403

75R

I461

I462

I463

I464

I465

2419

I468

I469

I470

5VSTBY

AFC

STBY

8SC1

BOUT

AIN1L

AIN1R

F5108

GND

V V V V

3471

GND

100K

F5103

I457

47u

2414

100n

2413

GND

I414

100n

2411

R|PR|COUT-TV

G|YOUT-TV

B|PBOUT-TV

FBOUT-TV

Y|CVBSOUT-TV

CIN-TV

Y|CVBSIN-TV

Y|CVBSIN-TUN

CIN-TUN

C-GATE

DIGOUT1

DIGOUT2

DIGOUT3

DIGOUT4

DIGOUT5

DIGOUT6

SDA

SCL

VDD

GND

1V 1V 1V

3.5V

1.4V

I466

2.1V

2.4V

0V 0V

0V 0V 0V

5V 5V

I456

VCC

GNDB-REC

GND

F5102

2434

100n

2435

GND

VCCB232VCCB3

VCCB1

R|PR|CIN-ENC

VCCB-REC

CVBSIN-ENC

Y|CVBSOUT-REC

Y|CVBSOUT-AUX

R|PR|CIN-AUX

Y|CVBSIN-AUX

GND1

GND226GNDB

GND

I405

5VSTBY

GND

5SW

FBIN

from/to uP Board (1)

GND

1947

A_R

A_YCVBS

D_Y F4714

AOUT1R

AIN1R

1940-1

4401

YCVBSIN2

6423

BZX384-C12

GND

3467 34683465 3466

3472

100K

GND

F5101

GND

3475

100R

3476

100R

2.5V

A_C

2405

100n

2440

2439 100n

2433

1.8V

2423

3494

150R

GND

47n

GND

5VSTBY

5402

10u10u

47u

2.6V

2437

2.5V

GND

2418

2427

3452

150R

F4712

GND

12131415161718

D_CVBS

A_YCVBS

5VSTBY

5406

10u

47u

7408

STV6618

2409

GND

I483

I482

G|YIN-ENC

B|PBIN-ENC

CIN-ENC YIN-ENC

COUT-AUX

G|YIN-AUX

B|PBIN-AUX

FBIN-AUX

GND

DECV

GNDD

GND

A_B

456

A_G

I481

11 4

I479

I478

I476

1.6V

1.4V

2.5V

4.5V

35 19

2.1V

F4707

GND

789

from / to Digital Board (6) - EPG Board (11)

D_C F 4716

AOUT1L

2438

F4714

GND

D_Y

D_R F4718

AIN1L

F4716

6417 B12

1940-1 A8

6418 B12

5NESD

1940-2 A13 1940-3 A14 1942 E1 1943 C1 1945-1 I2 1947 I7 1948 F14 1949-A H14 1949-B H14 1949-C G14 2401 B4 2402 B1 2403 D3 2404 D3 2405 C8 2406 I4 2407 I2 2408 F3 2409 D8 2410 C4 2411 D6 2412 I2 2413 C7 2414 C7 2415 C10 2416 G11 2417 F4 2418 F9 2419 E6 2420 F13 2421 E1 2422 F13 2423 G9 2424 G13 2425 G12 2427 G9 2428 F3 2429 H13 2430 E12 2432 H13 2433 E9 2434 C8 2435 C7 2436 E10 2437 E9 2438 F9 2439 E9 2440 E9 2441 E10 2442 H13 2443 G13 2444 H13 2445 I11 2446 H6 2447 I14 2448 I13 2449 F1 2450 B2 2459 E2 2460 H11 2461 G11 2462 I11 2463 I13 2464 A3 3400 H4 3401 B11 3402 B12 3403 B12 3404 B4 3405 B2 3406 B2 3407 B3 3408 B1 3409 B5 3410 C6 3411 B10 3412 C5 3413 B6 3414 C5 3415 H4 3416 H4 3417 C11 3418 I3 3419 I4 3420 F11 3421 C14 3422 D13 3423 D14 3424 E14 3425 E12 3426 E13 3427 C11 3428 E14 3429 E1 3431 E12 3432 C3 3433 C3 3434 F13 3435 F13 3436 F13 3437 G1 3438 G1 3439 F5 3440 H3 3441 H13 3442 D13 3443 I11 3444 I13 3445 E5 3446 B3 3447 A3 3448 I11 3449 F12 3450 I13 3451 I4 3452 G9 3453 D1 3454 A3 3455 D4 3456 I14 3457 I11 3458 H2 3459 G4 3460 H3 3461 A14 3462 A14 3463 A13 3464 A12 3465 B7 3466 B7 3467 B8 3468 B8 3469 B14 3470 B12 3471 B7 3472 B8 3473 I12 3474 I14 3475 B9 3476 B9 3477 B14 3478 B14 3481 F2 3482 E4 3483 F3 3484 F3 3485 G11 3486 H11 3487 H13 3488 H13 3489 E1 3490 D4 3491 D11 3492 D11 3493 D12 3494 G9 3495 I11 3496 I14 3955 H6 4401 A9 4402 E1 5401 C4 5402 C9 5403 C6 5404 F12 5406 C8 6401 B4 6402 B6 6403 B6 6404 B6 6409 A4 6414 B5 6415 B11 6416 B12

6419 B11 6420 A5 6422 A11 6423 A8 6424 B10 6425 G13 6426 G13 6427 H13 6428 H13 6429 I14 7401 B2 7402 B3 7403 B1 7404 I4 7405 C14 7406 F13 7407 E14 7408 D8 7409 D14 7410 G11 7411 D3 7412 H5 7415 I12 7416 I14 7419 H2 7420 H3 7421 H4 F401 H2 F402 H2 F412 I5 F4203 F1 F4205 F2 F4207 F1 F4209 G1 F4210 E1 F4505 I3 F4707 I8 F4712 I9 F4714 I9 F4716 I10 F4718 I10 F4720 I10 F4721 I10 F4722 I10 F485 F14 F499 A3 F5101 B8 F5102 B8 F5103 B7 F5106 B6 F5108 A7 F5110 A5 F5113 A6 F5116 A5 F5119 A5 F5120 B4 F5201 A14 F5202 A13 F5206 A12 F5207 A12 F5208 C12 F5210 A11 F5211 A12 F5213 A12 F5215 A11 F5216 B11 F5219 A11 F5220 F11 F913 D10 I341 A13 I402 D14 I405 H7 I406 B2 I407 B2 I408 B3 I409 B3 I411 D3 I412 D4 I413 C3 I414 D7 I415 F3 I416 F3 I417 E4 I418 H1 I419 I1 I420 I6 I424 I5 I428 I4 I429 I2 I431 I11 I433 I13 I434 I13 I437 G14 I438 G13 I439 G13 I440 F13 I441 H13 I442 G12 I443 G12 I444 H12 I445 H12 I446 H11 I447 G11 I448 G12 I449 F13 I451 F13 I453 H4 I454 I4 I456 C7 I457 C7 I458 A6 I459 A6 I460 A5 I461 D6 I462 E6 I463 E6 I464 E6 I465 E6 I466 E6 I467 D14 I468 G6 I469 G6 I470 G6 I476 F8 I478 E8 I479 E8 I481 E8 I482 E8 I483 D8 I484 F12 I485 I12 I486 I14

YCVBSIN2

CVBSOUT2

20B

6419

18B

19B

F5210

F5219

6422

GND

BZX384-C12

FBIN

16B

17B

BZX384-C3V9

15B

F5215

3401

GND

14B

75R

21B

GND

3411

75R

5NESD

6424

5NESD

2415

GND

BZX384-C12

3427

100p

not used

GND

75R

F5216

3417

GND

75R

3491

6415

150R

BZX384-C12

3492

F913

2436

2441

F5220

3420

150R

GND

2416

2461

4u7

2460

4u7

GND

F4718

GND

D_R

D_C

GND

F4722

F4720

F4721

D_B

D_G

ALDAC

7410 NJM2267M

2.3V

I447

VIN1

6DB

3485

not used

GND

2.3V

I446

VIN2

6DB

3486

not used

GND

I431

3448

2462

470R

10u

3443

100K

GND

AKILL

BC817-25W(COL)

3457

3495

-4.3V

470R

DAC_MUTE

11 12 13 14

D_G F 4720

12 13 14

2424

GND

2443

100u

2432

100u

GND

470R

I449

2442

22u

2429

22u

GND

I341

47u

I434

3444

GND

3488

GND

3463

3422

820R

3442

150K

2420 100n

100K

3435

75R

I438

I441

3450

470R

100K

AIN2R

11.1/0V

0/0.6V

WSRO

3487

GND

5NESD

13B

F5213

F5211

3402

GND

6416

5NESD

150R

I485

2445

GND

7415

D_B F 4722

12B

11B

F5207

75R

3403150R

GND

6417

BZX384-C12

F5208

3493

5VSTBY

3431

5SW

I448

470p

10B

75R

BZX384-C12

4K7

3449 150R

10u

5404

V+

GND

8SC2

F5206

2430

GND

1.6V

I484

VOUT1

VSAG1

VOUT2

VSAG2

3464

3470

100K

6418

GND

2425

GND

3473 100R

AIN2L

BZX384-C12

5VSTBY

100n

3425

2.2V

7406 BC857BW

GND

100n

2.6V

I442

I443

2.5V

2.6V

I444

I445

2.5V

I433

2463

10u

ARDAC

1940-2

F5202

3462 3461

GND

3469

100K

BC847BW

33K

3426

GND

3428 100K

2422

4K7

3434

GND

I451

68R

3436

I440

I439

6425

6426

BZX384-C12

5NESD5NESD

I437

3441 75R

6427

100K

5NESD

2444

6428

BZX384-C12

GND

BC817-25W(COL)

470p

2448

GND

12VSTBY

7405

I402

11.7/0.1V

7409 BC847BW

GND

0/0.6V

10n

GND

BZX384-C12

GND

470p

3474 100R

7416

1940-3

GND

F5201

GND

VVV

3477

GND

100R

3478 100R

12VSTBY

27K

3421

11.7/0.2V

3423

390R

I467

33K

3424

11.6/0V

7407 BC847BW

GND

REAR OUT S-CONN

1948

TCS79

1949-C

LPR6520

GND

1949-B

LPR6520

GND

1949-A

LPR6520

2447 470p

I486

BZX384-C12

3456

3496

-4.3V

470R

0350808190

GND

AOUT2R

AIN2R

AOUT2L

AIN2L

F485

GND

CVBS

GND

6429

AKILL

DAC_MUTE

TR07005_001

110303

A: DC, 500mV /Div

10us/Div

, 500mV/Div

A: DC

10us/Div

A: DC , 500mV/Div

10us/Div

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

A: DC

, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

, 200mV/Div

A: DC 10us/Div

Page 98

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Analog Board: IN/Out Audio (IOA)

EN 98DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7.

2504

3510

GND

AIN1L

3516

GND

1 23456

2503

GND

5VSTBY

100n

VDD

LOGIC

VSA1

I505

VSA2

I506

LSBMSB

AIN1R

2505

7503

HEF4052BT

100K

2524

I527

3534

GND

AFEL

3514

GND

100K

2525

I528

AFER

I503

0V 0V

I502

3507

100K

GND

I501

I504

3511

100K

GND

1 5

23 4

GND

14 15

VEE

GND

VSS

2518

100n

GND

F504

5NSTBY

F501

3530

GND

F502

820R

3528

-4.3V

4K7

7509

BC817-25W(COL)

AKILL

GND

5VSTBY

2510

100u

GND

5VSTBY

3532

I511

I510

2516

I533

3520

3533

I531

100u

220R

2520

AOUT2L

AKILL

3 8

I507

3K9

3535

not used

GND

I509

3K9

3536

not used

GND

3529

4K7

BC817-25W(COL)

5NSTBY

5VSTBY

3508

5NSTBY

3513

GND

-4.3V

7511

2519

100u

2509 100n

2514 100n

3531

820R

GND

7502-A MC33079

GND

AIN2R

2506

3504

GND

2501

100K

AIN2L

3503

GND

100K

3506 100K

GND

AINFL

2507

3505

100K

AINFR

2508

I515

I516

I513

I514

5VSTBY

ASC1S

IASC1M

from IOV

LOGIC

from IOV

LSBMSB

7502-B MC33079

GND

2535

GND

100n

VDD

7504

I521

HEF4052BT

GND

I508

2511

I532

3521

100u

220R

2517

2513

AOUT2R

GND

X5R

1u0

from DAC_ADC

ALDAC

GND

1u0

2515

from DAC_ADC

ARDAC

GND

X5R

14 15

VEE

VSS

2536

GND

100n

GND

I519

I529

5NSTBY

4567

789

5VSTBY

2502

100n

GND

VDD

7501

HEF4052BT

1 5

23 4

14 15

VSS

2512

5NSTBY

3515

3523

3538

GND

3537

GND

VEE

100n

I520

3K9

I530

3K9

RSA1

916

LOGIC

not used

3518

not used

3526

GND

RSA2

I502/I504

LSBMSB

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

3502

I517

I518

7502-D MC33079

I534

7502-C MC33079

I539

3509

2522

100u

2526

100u

2531

2532

I525

100p

7505-B

MC33078

I526

100p

I535

I540

I517/I518

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

not used

3501

5VSTBY

not used

3512

5NSTBY

-4.3V

I523

3517

4K7

7506

BC817-25W(COL)

-4.3V

I524

3519

4K7

7508

BC817-25W(COL)

3522

220R

3525

220R

MC33078 7505-A

2521 100n

2530 100n

2523

GND

2527

GND

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

GND

3524

GND

F501/F502

GND

820R

3527

820R

TR 07006_001

GND

ALADC

ARADC

AKILL

from IOV

AOUT1R

to IOV

AOUT1L

to IOV

120303

2501 A5 2502 A6 2503 A2 2504 A1 2505 A1 2506 A4 2507 A6 2508 A6 2509 B4 2510 A3 2511 E4 2512 D7 2513 F4 2514 C4 2515 F5 2516 E3 2517 F4 2518 E2 2519 A4 2520 F3 2521 C9 2522 E8 2523 E9 2524 F1 2525 F1 2526 F8 2527 F9 2530 C9 2531 B8 2532 C8 2535 D5 2536 F5 3501 B8 3502 B8 3503 A5 3504 A5 3505 C6 3506 B5 3507 C1 3508 C3 3509 C8 3510 D1 3511 D1 3512 D8 3513 D3 3514 E1 3515 D7 3516 E1 3517 D8 3518 E7 3519 E8 3520 F3 3521 F4 3522 E9 3523 E7 3524 E9 3525 F9 3526 F7 3527 F9 3528 F2 3529 F3 3530 F2 3531 F4 3532 C3 3533 D3 3534 C1 3535 C3 3536 D3 3537 F7 3538 E7 7501 A7 7502-A C4 7502-B D4 7502-C E7 7502-D D7 7503 B2 7504 D5 7505-A B9 7505-B C8 7506 D9 7508 E9 7509 F2 7511 F4 F501 E2 F502 F2 F504 D2 I501 C1 I502 C1

I503 B1 I504 D1 I505 B2 I506 B2 I507 C3 I508 E4 I509 D3 I510 D3 I511 C3 I513 C6 I514 C6 I515 B6 I516 B6 I517 B8 I518 C8 I519 D6 I520 D7 I521 D6

I523 D9 I524 E9 I525 B8 I526 C8 I527 F1 I528 F1 I529 E6 I530 E7 I531 E3 I532 E4 I533 E3 I534 E8 I535 E8 I539 F8 I540 F8

Page 99

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

EN 99DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7.

Analog Board: Power Supply (PS)

GND

F309

F308

1931

9452A

F313

1934

EH-B

not used

1932

3V3

GND

12V

GND

3V3

4V6

F381

F383

F384

PH-B

1933

F350

F351

3 4

F353

5 6

F355

F358

12V

F360

PH-B

TO DIGITAL BOARD

TO DVD+RW BASIC ENGINE

1 4 5 6 10 11

F327 VDrain (Standby)

1300

1301

T1,25A E

F314

12V GND GND

3V3

GND

12V GND GND

GND

F348

3V3

F349

GND

F352

4V6

GND

F354

GND

F357

12V

F327 VDrain (no disc loaded)

2340

F311

3305

220n

2302

470p

F310

680K

300V 8

DRAIN

TEA1507

7313

VCC

13,9V

GNDHOT

I306

3306

1302

220R

DSP

5302

HF2022R

I324

1,9V

3318

DRIVER

CTRL4DEMAG

GND HVS

3 5V

GNDHOT

3347

100R

GNDHOT

I331

SENSE

2337

4K7

GNDHOT

STP3NC60FP

2317

3351 1M0

10p

not used

2331

F328

I330

F342

I348

GNDHOT

I324 VDrain (Standby)

I317

7307

3365

2342

100n

I314

3K3

2303

6301

1N4006GP

6305

1N4006GP

340V

I307

3324

560K

GNDHOT

BAT254

2324

45678

3301

GNDHOT

2309

GNDHOT

6321

100n

1N4006GP

I312

1N4006GP

68u

47p

2315

3321

0R47

3356

6316

2325

GNDHOT

6302

6306

2307

3352

GNDHOT

820R

I340

BAV21

22u

3308

3360

I325

0R68

I316

330K

6311

GNDHOT

3366

820R

3309

330K

1N4003

1K5

F306

3310

330K

I321

6309

BYT42M

1K8

3367

I343

7314

TCET1108G

2318

2n2

2308

2314

5Vreg

3300

3M3

F307

47n

not used

5304

GNDHOT

I350

3317

3330

470R

I300

I322

I335

F338

GNDHOT

3M3

GNDreg

I344

4.5V

2329 100n

F361

2301

I302

2n2

5300 SRW28EC9-E02V0133

GND

3331

I351

10R

7315

TL431

2.5V

I355

4K7

3333

GNDreg

GND

3334

GNDreg

56K

F315

F320

16 14

3357 4K7

3332 5K6

3345 15K

not used

F305

3319

F304

F312

STPS5L40

GND GND

F323

STPS3L60-C2

F329

6315

I332

6312

I336

3346

3363

I339

0.4V

4R7

SB340

6307

6308

6310

BZX384-C6V8

2K2

BC847BW

5Vreg

3Vreg

2316

47n

6300

6303

6313

SBYV27-200

BAS316

7310

GND

I308

GNDreg

3Vreg

F319

2312

GND

5VSTBY

3364

3328

3358

2336

GND

I303

2333

I310

F326

F366

10K

I345

BC847BW

10R

100n

C300

5306

2u2

I361

47n

5Vreg

5308

22u

F316

GND

F318

2319

GND

1303 T1A

MRT

F339

GND

2304

F359

2n2

IPFAIL

2306

1304

5309

5305 Bead

3359

4K7

not used

GND

T4A

22u

F368

2305

GND

F367

7311

789

I324 VGate (no disc loaded)

I325 VSource (Standby)

I325 VSource (no disc loaded)

12VSTBY

560u

I311

F356

2320

GND

F369

2322

GND

F337

5VSTBY

GND

12V

3337

F317

560u

2313

GND

330u

5307

22u

3322

47R

not used

9304

F336

6319

BYD33D

7321

PDTC124EU

2335

STBY

12V

3311

GND

3335

470R

2328

8.8V

2341

GND

10u

GND

I326

2323

GND

F334

F335

22u

3355

47R

I304

I313

2339

GND

3.4V

I319

1N5819

100u

BYD33D

12VSTBY

GND

5.7V

9301

not used

6325

6317

3348

3362

2334

3336 470R

5.7V

3338 220R

680R

100n

7302

3312 220R

12V

6314

7318

I349

6320

GND

8.8V

I305

I315

7.7V

SI2306DS

I337

5.2V

7317

STD17NF03L

2310

7.9V

5.2V

STP16NF06FP

2311

9.3V

3.4V

23 1

7303

STS9NF30L

2330

I320

12V

22.2V

-5.5V

47K

3325

2321

I327

I329

3302

3350

3304 10K

10n

2326

GND

12VSTBY

3349

47R 3371

47R

3372

33R

3373

33R

7319 BC846B

BZX384-C8V2

I352

BAS316

8SW

8.1V

10.4V

I347

TL431

100n

I333

3368

3K3

7309

F363

3364 G8

F300

3339

GND

I323

-5.5V

SI2312DS

55V

I334

I338

2327

GND

not used

I357

33VSTBY

3361

100n

3326

47R

9305

3354

2K7

3340

GND

3342

3343

GND

3314

3315

GND

3313

3323

GND

7312 BF422

6318

GND

-29.5V

I301

I309

I318

F340

2.5V

7301

2.5V

7304

2.5V

7305

3303

3307

10K

F362

3353

2K7

12 13

1307

F364

T1A

MRT

4K7

68K

4K7

3341

F373

GND

4K7

68K

4K7

3344

GND

4K7

8K2

3316

F321

GND

100K

7306

22.2V

220K

PDTC124EU

GND

6322

BZX384-C6V8

32.8V

33.5V

BZX79-B33

4301

not used

F343

7322 BC857BW

-27.5V

I356

100n

2338

6324

BZX384-C27

I342

GND

12 13

F301

3374

GND

12V

F371

-26.9V

470R

F374

F324

0.1V

F372

PDTC124EU

I354

STBY

F302

3375

T800mA

12V

470R

1309

19372

1308

500mA

PSC

1306

125mA

MP13

3376

F347

F331

7308

470R

9306

not used

F322

GND

3377

6304

F325

F346

F333

F341

33VSTBY

3327

I346

20V

3329

GND

470R

not used

1N4003

4V6

F382

F344

1M2M2

7320

SI2306DS

2332

1u0

3V3

5VSTBY

12VSTBY

ION

5NSTBY

33VSTBY

VGNSTBY

5.1V

I353

5SW

TR 07007_001

3V3

120303

1300 A1 1301 B1 1302 A3 1303 E8 1304 C9 1306 G13 1307 A12 1308 D13 1309 A13 1931 B1 1932 E1 1933 H1

1934 D1 2301 A6 2302 B2 2303 B4 2304 G8 2305 B8 2306 B9 2307 C4 2308 C5 2309 D4 2310 A10 2311 B10 2312 C8 2313 C9

2314 D5 2315 E4 2316 A7 2317 E3 2318 G5 2319 D8 2320 D9 2321 E10 2322 E9 2323 E9 2324 H4

2325 H4 2326 G10 2327 G11 2328 G9 2329 I6 2330 C10 2331 I3 2332 H13 2333 A8 2334 I10 2335 D9 2336 I8

2337 H3 2338 H11 2339 B10 2340 A2 2341 B9 2342 F3 3300 A5 3301 A6 3302 F10 3303 F11 3304 F10 3305 B2

3306 A3 3307 F11 3308 C4 3309 C5 3310 C5 3311 C9 3312 C10 3313 D11 3314 C11 3315 C11 3316 C12

3317 H6 3318 E3 3319 A7 3321 E4 3322 F9 3323 E11 3324 G4 3325 E10 3326 G11 3327 H13 3328 H8 3329 I13

3330 I6 3331 I6 3332 I7 3333 I6 3334 I7 3335 A9 3336 A10 3337 B9 3338 B10 3339 A11 3340 A11 3341 A12

3342 B11 3343 B11 3344 B12 3345 I7 3346 F7 3347 I3 3348 H10 3349 G10 3350 F10 3351 G3 3352 E4

3353 H11 3354 H11 3355 I9 3356 G4 3357 H7 3358 H8 3359 H9 3360 G4 3361 F11 3362 H10 3363 G7

3365 F3 3366 G5 3367 G5 3368 D11 3371 H10 3372 H10 3373 H10 3374 A12 3375 A12 3376 A13 3377 A13 4301 G12 5300 A6 5302 B3 5304 D6 5305 G9 5306 C8 5307 E9 5308 A8 5309 D9 6300 A7 6301 B4 6302 B4 6303 B7 6304 B13 6305 C4 6306 C4 6307 C7 6308 C7 6309 D5 6310 D7 6311 E5 6312 F7 6313 E8 6314 I10 6315 E7 6316 H4 6317 F10 6318 G11 6319 G9 6320 I10 6321 G4 6322 F12 6324 H12 6325 E10 7301 A11 7302 B10 7303 C10 7304 B11 7305 C11 7306 D12 7307 E3 7308 H13 7309 E11 7310 H7 7311 H8 7312 F11 7313 G2 7314 H5 7315 I6 7317 A10 7318 D10 7319 I10 7320 H13 7321 I9 7322 G12 9301 E10 9304 F9 9305 H11 9306 B13 C300 B8 F300 A11 F301 A12 F302 A12 F304 A7 F305 A7 F306 A5 F307 A5 F308 B1 F309 B1 F310 B2 F311 B2 F312 B7 F313 B1 F314 B1 F315 C7 F316 C8 F317 C9 F318 C8 F319 C8 F320 C7 F321 D12 F322 D13 F323 D7 F324 D12 F325 D13 F326 D8 F328 E3 F329 E7 F331 F13 F333 F13 F334 F9 F335 F9 F336 G9 F337 G9 F338 G6 F339 G8 F340 G11 F341 G13 F342 G3 F343 G12 F344 G13 F346 E13 F347 E13 F348 H1 F349 H1 F350 H1

F351 H1 F352 H1 F353 I1 F354 I1 F355 I1 F356 C9 F357 I1 F358 I1 F359 I8 F360 I1 F361 I6 F362 G11 F363 G11 F364 A12 F366 E8 F367 E8 F368 E9 F369 E9 F371 G12 F372 G12 F373 A12 F374 A12 F381 F1 F382 E13 F383 G1 F384 G1 I300 A6 I301 A11 I302 A6 I303 A8 I304 A10 I305 A10 I306 A3 I307 G4 I308 B8 I309 B12 I310 B8 I311 B9 I312 B4 I313 B10 I314 B3 I315 B10 I316 B5 I317 C3 I318 C11 I319 C10 I320 C10 I321 D5 I322 D6 I323 D11 I324 E3 I325 E5 I326 E9 I327 F10 I329 F10 I330 F3 I331 F3 I332 F7 I333 F11 I334 F11 I335 F6 I336 F7 I337 F10 I338 F11 I339 G7 I340 G4 I342 I12 I343 H5 I344 H6 I345 H8 I346 H13 I347 H10 I348 I3 I349 H10 I350 I5 I351 I6 I352 I10 I353 I13 I354 I12 I355 I7 I356 H12 I357 H11 I361 I8

A: DC, 100V/Div 5us/Div

A: DC, 1V/Div 5us/Div

A: DC, 2V/Div 2us/Div

A: DC, 50mV/Div 5us/Div

A: DC, 50mV/Div 2us/Div

100

Page 100

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Analog Board: Multi Sound Processing (MSP)

1234567

8SW

5SW

8SW

SCLSW

SDASW

3601

100R

3603

100R

I615

I616

2607

GND

SIF1

I607

56p

2609

56p

I608

1960

DVAR

GND

DVAL

from DV - Board

PH-B

F6001

F6002

F6004

GND

2626

2u2

2627

2u2

I630

I631

3606

3607

I620

I621

1.5V

3.8V

7600

MSP3415G

I2C_CL

I2C_DA

I2S_CL

I2S_WS

I2S_DA_OUT

I2S_DA_IN1

I2S_DA_IN2

ANA_IN-

ANA_IN+

MONO_IN

SC1_IN_R

SC1_IN_L

SC2_IN_R

SC2_IN_L

QFP44

DEMODULATOR

VREF2

VREF1

GND

AHVSS

I602

IDENT

A/D

GND

ADR_CL

ASG

ADR_SEL

AVSS

I624

FM1 FM2 NICAM A NICAM B

IDENT

SCART-L

SCART-R

SCART

DVSS 20

GND

EN 100DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7.

RSA1

I625

D_CTR_IO1

S1...4

5SW

5601

RSA2

GND

4601

TESTEN

D_CTR_IO0

I2SL/R

Switching Facilities

23 24 28 32

10u

I2SL/R

LOUDSPEAKER R

LOUDSPEAKER L

DFP

HEADPHONE R

HEADPHONE L

5SW1

I612

2605

SCART-R

SCART-L

5602

10u

I613

2600

2623

10u

I603

2.6V

AVSUP

100n

D/A

GND

2601

D/A

10n

VREFTOP

8SW

I601

10u

2603

2602

I604

7.6V

5.9V

AHVSUP

LOUDSPEAKER

XTAL_IN6XTAL_OUT

CAPL_M

STBYQ

DVSUP

RESETQ

DACM_R

DACM_L

AGNDC

SC1_OUT_R

SC1_OUT_L

GND

2.3V 2.2V 1600

I610

HC-49/U

18M432

3p3

2620

2621

100n

5.1V

3.8V

I611

2611

GND

3.8V

3p3

I614

I605

I617

I609

I623

47u

5SW

3600

2616

GND

10K

2617

GND

2610

2612

10n

4u7

5SW1

2606

GND

3612

100R

5600

3611

100R

10u

100n

2618

GND

2604

GND

6600

4n7

10n

BAS316

2619

GND

3602

2608

GND

4n7

4K7

10u

AFER

AFEL

1600 F7 1960 E1 2600 A6 2601 A6 2602 A7 2603 A7 2604 A9 2605 F5 2606 B8 2607 C2 2608 C9 2609 C2 2610 C8 2611 A7 2612 D8 2616 E8 2617 E8 2618 E9 2619 E9 2620 F7 2621 F7 2623 F6 2626 E2 2627 E2 3600 A8 3601 B2 3602 B9 3603 B2 3606 E2 3607 E2 3611 D9 3612 E8 4601 A5 5600 A8 5601 F5 5602 F6 6600 B9 7600 A3 F6001 E1 F6002 E1 F6004 E1 I601 A7 I602 A4 I603 A6 I604 A7 I605 B8 I607 C1 I608 C3 I609 D8 I610 F7 I611 F7 I612 F5 I613 F6 I614 B8 I615 B3 I616 B3 I617 B8 I620 E3 I621 E3 I623 E8 I624 A5 I625 A5 I630 E2 I631 E2

GND

234561

GND

TR 07008_001

120303